JP2022010048A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with excellent work efficiency.

SOLUTION: Since a board face support device 600 is provided with a rotary front pawl member 620 approaching to a game board 13 from a reception side (one side), when the game board 13 is set into a use state. Therefore, even if a push-in of the game board 13 is not enough, the rotary front pawl member 620 abuts the game board 13 to add thrusting force. As the result, there is an effect that the game board 13 can be pushed into a position of the use state.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 129

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means for changing the state between a fixed state in which the gaming board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the gaming board is removable from the inner frame (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-230420

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of work efficiency related to the fixing means. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having good work efficiency related to fixing means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an opening between the gaming means used during the game and one side facing the gaming means, and can accept the gaming means from that one side. The receiving means is provided with a state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state in which the gaming means cannot be used to a usable state in which the gaming means can be used. The state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the game means from one side when the game means is put into the use state.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the state changing means changes the state to an unusable state that makes the gaming means unusable. Displace to one side.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable, and the proximity means becomes unusable. , Evacuate to the outside of the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, work efficiency can be improved.

According to the second aspect of the present invention, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the work efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means from the receiving means can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the work efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means from the receiving means can be improved by retracting the proximity means. can.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). 6 is a front perspective view of the operating device in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operating device in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in the XIVc line. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the drive device, and (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. (A) and (b) are front views of the release member and the rotary claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of an operating device in the XXX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 59 (a). It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction view of the arrow LIXc. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vibrating apparatus in line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. 65 (a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG. 66 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. Is. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member, the ring member, and the second transmission member of the left disk cam. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXXVa-LXXVa of FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f). Is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which opened (deployed) the inner frame with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame with the inner frame opened with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are shown side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically showing a binding movable member and a harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a binding movable member and a harness. It is a schematic diagram of the back surface schematically shown, and (d) is a schematic view of the upper surface of FIG. 96 (c). (A) and (b) are the top schematic views of the front frame, the inner frame, the binding movable member and the harness which schematically show the binding movable member and the harness. It is a front view of the passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of the support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly in the CXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly of FIG. 124 (a). It is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction view, and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction view of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of the above. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line of FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device and the game board schematically showing the board surface support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (A) to (c) are the front view of the ball launching unit which shows the feeding state of the ball by the ball feeding device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting showing the relationship between the thread and the metal member for cutting in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of a ball launching unit, an inner rail and an outer rail after launching a ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation apparatus in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of the slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate, the side base material, and the second effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of the inner frame and the dish passage forming member in eleventh embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (A) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlargement view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the slit member and the slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 203 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). Yes, (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing the upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and is located in an area composed of a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can easily enter. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by arranging the fingertip on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a) is shown. Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the vertical direction, and FIG. 7 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state facing upward and rearward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is shown. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press a button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a method of dropping the hand vigorously downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front side depending on the degree of tilting. The palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping his / her hand downward vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to operate by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to forcefully drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, the difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view will be described. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. 7. In FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's point of view in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i is gradually increased in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, and the LED device 341f (FIG. 3) is arranged inside the operation device 300 accordingly. Since the amount of light in (see 12) is gradually increased, the difference in the amount of light (degree of lightness and darkness) that the player can see between the first state and the second state becomes large, and the first state and the second state are displayed. The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to operate by lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the voice coil motor 352 that gives an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that gives the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner region of the lower frame member 320 is largely used for tilting. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. As a result, a large amount of movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the rear side end portion (the back end portion on the paper surface of FIG. 12) and tilting thereof. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defining the push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed portion arranged facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. To the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and that constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from three sides in the left-right direction and the rear direction.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member having a mode in which the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 which is inclined downward toward the front side and the bottom plate portion 321 thereof. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the above, and a semi-circular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, which is a tilting device 310. The lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, the left side detection sensor 324L arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the bottom plate portion 321 horizontally at the center position in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening opened by scraping a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a plurality of openings so as to determine the moving end of the tilting device 310 by abutting with the tilting device 310, and the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321 through the openings. To.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. It mainly includes an insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. By arranging the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b in the detection groove of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c is configured to have a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the drive device 340 is operated. A through hole is formed to a position where interference with the 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is formed of a U-shape extending upward from the upper surface thereof and having an open portion on the front side in the cross section. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distances (positions of the detection grooves) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 are the same on the left and right sides.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width thereof is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), the drive device 341f passes through the opening 325 and then the drive device. By pushing the 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331, which is an opening having a size for the extending portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. It is mainly provided with an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed of a semicircular shape whose lower side is open and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be separable in the vertical direction and is configured to cover three directions except the front side, and is a main body cover 351 fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351 thereof. The voice coil motor 352, which is supported by the bottom plate and is arranged on the front side and the vibration surface is directed diagonally forward and upward, the left side detection sensor 353L, which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and the right side. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the center of the left and right can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). As a result, when the tilting device 310 projects the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phase of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. The disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged in such a manner that they are arranged inside the detection groove of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether or not the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 include the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2. It becomes a kind.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14 (a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a side view of the tilting device 310. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14A. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 has a case body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and upper and lower openings, and a cover is provided on the upper opening of the case body 311. A mode in which the lid 312 to be fastened and fixed to the case body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312 are sandwiched between them. A ring shape that inseparably fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear ends of the shaft portion 314, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and the case body 311 and the lid 312. Mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending downward from a flange extending downward along the edge of the spring, and a recessed portion 311d which is a semicircular concave portion supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And the insertion groove 311e, which is a groove in which both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 are arranged at a position where they can be inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 311f, which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A pair of left and right detection pieces 311 gL extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311 gR (see FIG. 15), and a stretch extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. A protective lens member 311i, which is arranged above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311h and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and a protective lens member 311i formed of a light transmissive material, and a bottom plate portion. It mainly includes an overhanging convex portion 311j which is projected downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 on a surface when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the drive device 340. To prepare for.

The left side detection piece 311 gL and the right side detection piece 311 gR are the portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311 gL. However, the overhang length is longer than that of the right side detection piece 311 gR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311 gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311 gL with respect to the shaft portion 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push-in end (FIG. 22). The left side detection piece 311 gL is projected as compared with the right side detection piece 311 gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to (see 23).

The extending portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and projects to a position where it is locked to the opening portion 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Consists of aspects.

Since the protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape in the top view (see FIG. 14 (a)) and a curved shape in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 14 (c)), the player can use the protective lens member 311i. The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is projected at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and its tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 has a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b having the top plate member 312a. It is mainly provided with a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), due to its positional relationship, the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical. While it is fastened to the inside of the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), it is arranged in such a manner that such limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is configured to have a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , A spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 by a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the twisted portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , Equipped with.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 (a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 is a side view of the drive device 340. It is a front view exploded perspective view of.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 is a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 that constitutes a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member and a drive motor that generates a driving force. A pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the 342 and its drive motor 342 and the transmission shaft rod 343 so as not to rotate. 344R), the arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second of the disc cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. The release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, the rotary claw member 347 that is pivotally supported by the release member 346 and that moves relative to each other with the rotation of the release member 346, and the rotary claw member 347 are tilted down. A torsion spring-like first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of causing the force to separate from each other between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. It mainly includes a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is formed at the same position of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right to form a U-shape in the top view and the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is arranged opposite to each other, and is a disk. A shaft support hole 341b that pivotally supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that is convex in the left-right direction at a position deviated from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side in a manner having a shaft parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. , An extension portion 341d extending from the motor accommodating portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending forward and upward from the motor accommodating portion 341a, and the illumination support portion 341e thereof. It mainly includes an LED device 341f which is arranged at the upper end and has an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light of the LED device 341f both upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixing member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is bored in a perfect circle shape at one end, and is bored in a rectangular shape at a shaft support hole 345a pivotally supported by a connecting pin 344d of a disk cam 344 and at the other end. Along with this, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a comes into contact with the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 makes one or more rotations on the opposite end. It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which a disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b. Mainly prepared for.

The cylindrical member 343a is provided with fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the fixing portion 343a2 on the right side is formed longer toward the center than the fixing portion 343a1 on the left side. To. Here, the fixed portion 343a2 is specifically formed with a length capable of moving to a position where the movable clutch 343c does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b is a clutch in which a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which a cylindrical member 343a is inserted and an unevenness along the axial center direction are formed at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged facing the movable clutch 343c. A section 343b2 is provided.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and an unevenness along the axial direction at the circumferential position of the axis center from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b. It also includes a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of a chevron-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having a top angle of about 100 °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged with each other. Therefore, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. This makes it possible to rotate the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) by rotating the drive motor 342.

The movable clutch 343c is usually arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the urging force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. As for the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R have a substantially mirrored shape, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR, so only the left disk cam 344L. The description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

20 (a) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. be. Note that FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b) show a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is at the center position of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a projecting inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b projecting inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. The engaging rib 344c, which is convex inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding radially outward at two points, and the outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d which is convex in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL which is formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other components are a mirror image of the shape of the left disk cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer circumference is fitted in the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). It is composed. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is projected to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, the misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c is the first protruding outward in the radial direction at a position deviated by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. From the overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 and the first overhanging portion 344c1 that retract inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50 ° in this embodiment). At a position deviated from the angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), the second overhanging portion 344c3 that overhangs outward again in the radial direction and the angle θ3 from the second overhanging portion 344c3 (angle in the present embodiment). θ3 = 20 °) Mainly provided with a second retractable portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a displaced position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. Since the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one of them will be described.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In addition, FIG. 21A shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 has a shaft support hole 346a formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). From the convex pin 346b having an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and protruding in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion overhanging at the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be in contact with the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly performed.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and has an arc shape centered on a shaft support hole 347a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and a central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide slot 347b is bored along along the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 so as to be able to guide (the convex pin 346b is bored with a size including the movement locus inside), and the end of the second spring SP2. It is possible to insert the insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d which is projected downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). It is mainly provided with a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the release member 346 is arranged at the terminal position in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21 (a)) with respect to the rotary claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion is When a load in the push-up direction is applied to the 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle is small as shown in FIG. 21B.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in which the player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22. FIG. 24 Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand in which the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311 gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. The return of the spring is not in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 resists the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 that pushes down (see FIG. 18), and it is necessary to increase the size of the driving motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and the space cannot be saved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibration operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in. To.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in FIG. 23 in the extension direction, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player is informed. Since it gives an unnecessary load, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and when the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player repeatedly strikes. As a result, the player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (fanning operation) up and down from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a).

Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 shows that the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25, and the rotary claw member 347 The state in which the posture has changed is shown. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26, and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 returns. A state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and rotates is shown. FIG. 29 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. 29. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c is in contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be largely secured. As a result, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the intensity as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. When rotated in the direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346, so that the disengaging member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotary claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where the tilting device 310 is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a.

The posture change of the release member 346 is continued until the disk cam 344 is rotated until the first retractable portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises due to the urging force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the states of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 becomes an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, Due to the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotary claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 27). Return to the state shown in 25). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member The 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area visible from the player's point of view of the protective lens member 311i increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction by the same amount (FIG. 28 counterclockwise). By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 28).

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range thereof is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Fig. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 ascends from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 28, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c. Only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 29) and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 becomes the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 28. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force that assists the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and the purpose is to vibrate the tilting device 310 arranged at the push-in end position to produce a vibration effect. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 toward the end.

Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 to determine whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Can only be grasped.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 is not operated at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when the jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the value as a look-ahead means. As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction until the second overhanging portion 344c1 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346 (FIG. 29). By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction), the drive device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 and the engaging rib 344c come into contact with each other.

From the state shown in FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d and then rotates in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (fanning operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state (the tilting operation) ( The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (fanning operation) of reciprocating up and down through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). In FIG. 32, the state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31 is shown, and in FIG. 33, the state shown in FIG. 32 is shown. The disk cam 344 is shown to rotate reciprocally, and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the disc cam 344 is tilted. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disk cam 344. The tilting device 310 can be moved up with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disk cam 344 is tilted by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged). The 310 can be placed in a posture in which it can be arranged in the second state (a posture in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state in a short period of time from the state shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 interferes with the state change (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 33, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction by the same amount (FIG. 32 counterclockwise). By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 33).

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. That is, in the present embodiment, as an aspect of the vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (fanning movements), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. 33, are tilted by the rotary claw member 347. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the ascending movement of the device 310 is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to make two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342.

As a result, the operating member 310 can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big hit) in the operation mode as compared with the case where the operating member 310 performs the same operation each time, and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 33, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion). The 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into operation, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 33 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 is put into the first state. Can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotary claw member 347 after the player push-in operation will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (fanning movements) of the tilting device 310, or to continuously perform one of them.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). In FIG. 35, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 34 is shown. In FIG. 36, after the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35, the forward rotation direction is reached until the disc cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. The state of rotation (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) is shown, and in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. In FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c becomes the engaging portion of the disengaging member 346. Contact with 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 is changed by the engaging rib 344c pushing up the release member 346, but the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide slot 347b of the rotary claw member 347. It stays and the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 35.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344c and the disengaging member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotary cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the disk cam 344 goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. 36. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, as described above, it is possible to perform the vertical movement (fanning operation) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by pushing the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the effect and forgetting to release the operated hand. In this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the restriction by the rotary claw member 347 is lifted. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 may be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in the state where the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is used. (See FIG. 14) is controlled in a mode in which the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned on.

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not ascend due to the player's hand being placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. 37. The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is continuously placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) is maintained in the ON state when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is a circle as it is. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and an unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing destruction of the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. In FIG. 38, the player's hand that grips and fixes the tilting device 310 in the state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate idly with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a fixing the disk cam 344, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving in a state where the disk cam 344 is fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction via the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be disengaged, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. This makes it possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

If the player does not grasp the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disk cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operating device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and the third symbol display device 81 is notified to stop the gripping operation, for example. While doing so, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage to prevent a failure. be able to.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are deviated from each other. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state. By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with that state as the initial position, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. The control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are realigned.

As a result, when the effect is produced by operating the tilting device 310, there is a discrepancy between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. It is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform the effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 40. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is shown. Further, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CW is shown.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves upright toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c operates in such a manner that it separates from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c abuts on the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotary claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operation from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIGS. 40 and 42 both appear to be the same operation, and the subsequent movement after the first state is reached. Will be different from either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

For example, a difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in the change, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect to be performed, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is Since the direction is different only, it can be difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction depending on the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is operating toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the player confirms whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, so that the player can produce the effect. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player can see the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. You can make them watch over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. This can improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In addition, in FIG. 44, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in a predetermined amount forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340 is shown, and the first state is shown. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. ..

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 engage with the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not passing through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, since the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) according to the posture change of the release member 346, the tilting device 310 is in the manner shown in FIG. Even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and operated by the player in the case of vertical movement, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. It is possible to carry out an operation mode in which the claw member 347 moves upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues the vertical movement.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the operation is performed by providing a difference in production between the above-mentioned first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. 44. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the movement was performed or the movement was performed up and down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). Assuming that the difference is that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide a lot of timings for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

45 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45 (b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a release member 2346. It is a side view.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

FIG. 46A shows a state in which the rotary plate member 2347 rotates with respect to the release member 2346 to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 46B shows the release member 2346 with respect to the release member 2346. The small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the release member 2346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) has a release member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and rotation thereof as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). With the slide claw member 2348, which is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , Mainly prepared. The release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 have the same reference numerals as those having the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and the front end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b projecting in a hook shape toward the left side of FIG. 45, and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (FIG. 47 (a) in the vertical direction of the paper surface). Mainly a reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a convex pin 2348d projecting in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Be prepared.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is arranged on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that is attracted to the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotating plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The convex pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. As the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the convex pin 2348d is pushed to the side surface of the functional elongated hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides and moves.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. The support elongated hole 2347g through which the convex pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted is provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is forward-rotated on the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions arranged to face each other (FIG. It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on a shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) in a state of being arranged at the terminal position (46 counterclockwise).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with the convex pin 2348d inserted through the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. ..

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length composed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. Slide to move.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d, the movement speed of the release member 2346 remains unchanged from the movement of the convex pin 2348d without a time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346. It is reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also slows down.

As shown in FIG. 46A, in a large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the convex pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding and moving.

That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide and move due to the rotational operation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the pull of the slide claw member 2347 when the angle is large. It doesn't move. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

47 to 49 are drawings showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 47 illustrates a state in which the second retractable portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is arranged below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 48 shows the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 47. Is shown in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disk cam 344 is in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the release member 2346 is rotated clockwise) and returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by a magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the posture change of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will never be done.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the ascending direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by a magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is moved backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved ascending at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction on the ascending movement of the tilting device 2310 is lifted (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. .. As the number of operation modes increases, by associating the movement mode with the expected degree of jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the operation device 2300 for the player can be used. The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 rises due to the magnetic attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 can be applied to the tilting device 2310 by ensuring a large magnetic force as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, lift the player's hand in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in an embodiment.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the ascending direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be noticed. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state of being pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment has been described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or the state of being pushed by the player. To. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right side detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). It is provided with a left side detection piece 3311gL extending at a surface perpendicular to the axis and opposite to a surface arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left side detection piece 3311 gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311 gR, and its extension length is shorter than that of the left side detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are side views of the operation device 3300. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. None (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, while the right side is inserted. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the process of returning or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the end of pushing to the first state. .. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52B, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the push-in end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L. , The right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, which is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to give an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending. It is possible to effectively give a load for raising the tilting device 3310 by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is operating ascending rather than colliding with the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52B, the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly strikes the tilting device 3310, the ascending motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous striking operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 moves up as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 operates only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state of being pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has been described. Is an embodiment in which the tilting device 4310 detects the operating speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is projected in a plate shape from the front side of the overhanging convex portion 311j of the case body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the upper detection sensor 4321d, the lower detection sensor 4321e, and the detection groove (slit) of the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) arranged in the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection is possible. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300 showing the pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54 (a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54 (b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), and the front detection piece 4311k is detected on the lower side. The state in which the sensor 4321e has passed downward is shown. Further, in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e in a portion on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. It passes through 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passing timing, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 by the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which acceleration can be applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with the operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 becomes high. Therefore, if there is no means for deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies an urging force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the push-in end, and decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the urging force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who has decided to perform a gentle pushing operation, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it becomes easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a risk that the tilting device 4310 cannot be pushed in comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, when the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. On the other hand, when the timing interval described above is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled by driving.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

Further, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end is used as the reaction force against the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 overhangs below the lower frame member 4320. It is controlled by pushing the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 to the side close to the tilting device 4310 in advance.

As a result, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide with each other during the extrusion of the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. ..

Further, in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 is overhanging and convex while the tilting device 4310 is in the process of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the overhanging convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the push operation can be consumed to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, since the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction as in a disc brake, but a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force, damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the tilting device 4310 decelerates on the way from the first state to the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged at the push-in end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310 after pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to produce a vibration effect.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is attached to the lower frame member 5320. The drive motor 5411 for rotating the weight member 5412 whose center of gravity is eccentric is provided, and the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, as compared with the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5410 for rotationally driving a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is composed of a flexible material. The flexible member 5420 and the flexible member 5420 are formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, and the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 are separately accommodated and are fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. Mainly equipped with 5430.

The transmission device 5410 has a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411 is pivotally supported by a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan. And mainly prepare.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixed portion 5411a which is arranged in pairs on the left and right and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on the side where the shaft overhangs.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported by the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together with the drive motor 5411.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the opposite side of the insertion side, and the main body portion 5421 in the assembled state. A pair of rib-shaped legs 5422 that are convexly provided on the left, right, left, and right sides in the radial direction, and a rib-shaped leg portion 5422 that is projected left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421 are connected to each other. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a convex leg portion 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 in a pair of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth configured at the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the left and right sides is larger than the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 because the posture maintaining portion 5423 is arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422.

Since the convex leg portion 5424 is convex in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in the contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 has a first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and a second accommodating portion adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 and accommodating the weight member 5412. It mainly includes a 5432 and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connecting surface of the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is adjusted from the upper surface when the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom and the load applied during the insertion is released (assembly load release state). The depth is such that the convex leg portion 5424 overhangs.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 to provide a flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth is set to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly downward from the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. To.

59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59 (a), the portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first area S51, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310, and the player are pushed by the player three times from the first state. The end area S52, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the end position of the push, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the convex leg portion 5424 is convexly provided in the direction along the circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum amount of deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load release state in which the convex leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the convex leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extension direction view. Therefore, since the convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed evenly to the left and right on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (tilting to the left or right on the paper surface in FIG. 59 (b)). The convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d into which the convex leg portion 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and the lower side surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the shape of the convex leg portion 5424 and facilitate the translation of the main body portion 5421 together with the convex leg portion 5424 downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

60 (a) and 60 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 in the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 59 (a). Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows an assembly load release state, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the convex leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is shown. The outer shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembled load release state, and when the assembled load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic restoring force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the terminal position, the tilting device 310 is pushed back. The impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is ascended only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture in the assembled load release state. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started to be driven in the assembled load release state, the vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the accommodating member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced vertically due to the deformation of the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422. Consists of acceptable aspects.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged under the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and is uniformly spaced from the central axis to the left and right. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the radial outer ends of the rib-shaped leg 5422 move outward on the left and right (at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg 5422) as the flexible members 5420 move downward. It deforms in a manner of moving to the one with the smaller resistance) (see FIG. 60 (b)). In this case, since the convex direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right direction component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is partially applied by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a).

61 (a) and 61 (b) show an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side of the rotation axis. In b), a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show a state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the terminal region S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembled load state, the drive motor 5411 rotates at a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axis is placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof comes into contact with (rubs) the second accommodating portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared with the assembled load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61 (b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 are separated from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is set to the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ) Can be easily directed. Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). It is possible to reinforce the force to push back in the direction).

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separately the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. By configuring it with a combination of generated forces, it is possible to adjust the force that pushes back the tilting device 310.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the start of contact with the convex leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). After the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is applied to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the terminal region S52, so that the lightness of the tilting device 310 operation and the mitigation of the impact during the pushing operation can be satisfactorily achieved. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311 gL and the length of the right side detection piece 311 gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is different due to the difference in the detection timing. ) Is determined whether or not the operating speed is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to alleviate the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 61 (b)).

As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof is raised upward by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432. As a result, the weight member 5432 is located on the upper side of the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the convex leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10, for example, other than the portion touching the tilting device 310.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side surface of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing is used. Through, vibration can be transmitted to the player. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in the rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the pushing operation of the player can be detected. It is possible to make it easier to transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the motor.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (a pulsed pushing operation), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (the vibration does not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the preparation for vibration generation is ready, so that the vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. As a result, the player can experience the effect of vibration.

Further, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, it is possible to realize that the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed in a central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L have a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has a support cylinder portion P1 extending in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is arranged at the center position thereof, and the support cylinder portion P1 in the axial direction. Along the axis, a long hole recess C1 recessed from a disk portion in an axially symmetric long hole shape up to a position of about half of the extension distance, and a shaft of a support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portion in the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter of the support cylinder portion P1 equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recess C1.

The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole recess C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

The elongated recess C1 is formed with a concave cross section having a width slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the elongated hole recess C1.

Further, the facing surface of the elongated hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. This makes it possible to prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

The sandwiching arm portion A1 includes an engaging convex portion A1a that projects from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other side of the arm toward the opposite side of the arm. .. The engaging convex portion A1a engages with the tip end portion of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 is compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured for a long time.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the axis in the vicinity of the axis. It is arranged at a position that is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

As a result, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engaging convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63 (b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65 (b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is set as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a. Can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for the e-ring to touch the surface and slide it) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed width (diametrically wide) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the fitting groove 5343a3 sandwiched from the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side of the front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from a cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 that is a groove for fitting an e-ring and axially positioning the disk cam 5344 by the e-ring, and a fitting groove thereof. Mainly the engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages when the disk cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3. Be prepared. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Since the mechanism is adopted in which the e-ring is fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a part where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a by the e-ring, the cylinder is formed before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, so that the e-ring is formed in the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition to preventing the misalignment along the above, the e-ring can further prevent the misalignment of the disk cam 5344 in the axial direction.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the columnar member 5343a is the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 where the engaging convex portion A1a is arranged. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted into the engaging groove 5343a4, the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a are formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between the two is expanded. After that, when the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically restored, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing destruction in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

65 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV of FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 65 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). 66 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV of FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is a right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player gives an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and is a disk. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging convex portion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of holding arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes small. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R. The resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes large because of the contact with the cylinder member 5343a.

Therefore, when the player forcibly presses (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). The direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in a direction in which the resistance is small, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, On a surface parallel to the surface of the disk portion, the disk portion is deformed by tilting around the support shaft r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 65 (a).

67 (a) is a sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 67B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to fall. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 67A, the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is shown in an enlarged manner. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 that tries to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L that tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is shown by an imaginary line. The change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to the enlarged view.

In FIG. 67 (a), when the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd due to the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), the shaft support of the arm member 345 is rotated by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned, and in order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67A due to the shaft tilt deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the convex tip side are right circles. The position shifts along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of the right disk cam 5344R, so that the drive motor can be driven while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the 342 (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be relaxed.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring is in a direction repulsive to it. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disk cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotary claw member 347 is dammed by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so that the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 repels it. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotary claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disk cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or the disk cam 5344 is operated regardless of the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. Of any of the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased by the disc cam 5344. It can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of.

In this embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed from a shape that is axisymmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). Since the elongated hole recess C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the misalignment direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can be tilted and deformed by resistance.

68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68 (b), the protective cover device 350 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 68 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to fall. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 68A, a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven from the second state by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) and tilted down by an angle D2 is shown, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 68A, when the player grips the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344R is used regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting of the arm member 345, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The matter described as the right disk cam 5344R is also applicable to the left disk cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period during which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right side detection sensor 353R. However, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the right side detection sensor. Since the input to the 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, since it is necessary to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle before the occurrence of the overload is detected, there is a problem that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66B), the overload is applied. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, a method using a notification device E1 fixed to the engaging rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engaging rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in pairs at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of holding arm portions A1 and an engaging rib 344c intersect. At the same time, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65 (b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 66 (b)). Thereby, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment has the disk cam 344 and the engaging rib. The 344c is composed of a separate member, and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. Is. The right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, but since the right disk cam 6344R is composed of a mirrored shape with respect to the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, in this embodiment, the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a are different from those of the first embodiment, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL arranged in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and a disk member 6344L1 thereof. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially pivotally supported and rotates relative to a disk member 6344L1 is provided.

In the disc member 6344L1, the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disc portion, and is radially outwardly separated from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in an annular shape. The annular rib 6344f is provided so as to be convex along the ring rib 6344f.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and having an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and a circle thereof. The lid plate portion 6344h is arranged at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. 6344i is provided with a receiving gear tooth 6344i, which is formed in the thickened portion and is arranged radially outward in the thickened portion.

Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

The end face of the annular body 6344g on the axial disc member 6344L1 side comes into contact with the annular rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the disk member 6344L1 is in contact with the surface. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i is meshed with the deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (in the embodiment, the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation while the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations). , The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the deceleration transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear tooth 6344i is set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary pillar member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a and its auxiliary pillar. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a deceleration transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. Mainly equipped with 6348c.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is configured by a plurality of types.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (correctly). A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) as well as a posture in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the reverse direction by the amount of the rotation after the rotation exceeding one rotation. Is illustrated. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 is raised.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is subjected to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the arrival position when the tilting device 310 is lifted in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c. The relative relationship between the two can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 and tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 momentarily (disk cam) in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 72. It can rise to (without waiting for the rotation of 344) and change the position to reach.

Thereby, for example, when the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state and configures the gaming machine in such a manner that the expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in the height reached, the attention of the tilting device 310 is attracted. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise lower is higher.

However, by keeping the ascending arrival position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is reached. It is possible to relate the magnitude of the displacement and the magnitude of the displacement amount that the player pushes the tilting device 310 into, so that the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can make it happen. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the method of the game in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disk cam 7344 is a disk member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. 74. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R in the LXXVa-LXXBa line, and FIG. 75 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVb of FIG. 74 (a). Since the right disk cam 7344L is composed of a mirrored symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a into which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. The ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member 7434R2 and the engaging portion 7630 that is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. Mainly includes an engaging member 7344R3 having the above.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed from a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a in the center, and has a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape and an engaging rib. It is a member having a shape in which 344c is partially omitted (between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on a surface in the assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a first circular recessed portion 7410 thereof. 1 In the radial direction between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a smaller diameter than the circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be drilled and a fixing that is projected radially outward from the back side surface (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) of the second circular recessed portion 7420 in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430. Mainly provided with a protrusion 7440.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first long hole portion having a long rectangular shape along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position deviated from the intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The long hole 7431 and the second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending from the bottom end of the disk member 7344R1 of the first long hole 7431 along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1. A return portion 7433 formed by projecting toward the second elongated hole 7432 side with the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum is mainly provided.

The width direction (short side) dimension of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short side direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outward of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is an arrow LXXVIc direction view of FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is convexly provided and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. Mainly includes a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and forming a star-shaped through hole in the central portion.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recessed depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and the outer diameter dimension is slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. To. This makes it possible to prevent the relative rotation resistance from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to approach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and have an outer peripheral diameter. However, it is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. As a result, in the assembled state, the engaging member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75A), and the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 is prevented from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 is recessed in the deformed through hole 7521 formed along the axial direction and the deformed through hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (divided into five equal parts in the present embodiment) in the radial direction outward. It mainly includes an equally divided recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. It is composed.

77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is outside the radial direction of the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)). An arcuate plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 77B) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and an extension thereof. It is arranged on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620. It mainly includes a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 which is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the tip end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extension portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction facing the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip thereof becomes. It is composed of an extended length that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630 is slightly shorter than the widthwise dimension of the first elongated hole 7431, and the engaging portion 7630 is extended so as to pass through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the releasing member 346 and is displaced, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 78. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a). c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78 (c), and FIG. 78 (e) is a side view. It is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf of FIG. 78 (e).

In addition, in FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d), the state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is shown, and FIG. ) And FIG. 78 (f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. Further, for ease of understanding, in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d) and 78 (f), the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown.

As an assembly method of the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent assembly mistakes.

Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 to a position where the positions of the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide with each other in the depth direction of FIG. 78 (d). Moving.

At this position after movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 is suppressed from being displaced in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

Further, the engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward from the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is seconded by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

The tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in a state where it has entered the inside of the second elongated hole 7432, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 78 (d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. As a result, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disk member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1 with the engaging member 7344R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the radial outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. Due to this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned process, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backflip direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and others. Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the convex pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the ascending position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 is different from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion in FIG. 80 (a)) of the main body portion of the release member 7346 is slanted in order to minimize the interference with the engagement rib 344c.

In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 79 (a)). Is illustrated in chronological order.

79 (a) shows a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the release member 7346 and the release member 7346 starts to rotate, and FIG. 79 (b) shows FIG. 79 (a). ), The right disk cam 7344R is further rotated, and in FIG. 80 (a), the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2 is shown. In (b), a state in which the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 81, the right disk cam is shown from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after the 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is shown in the figure. In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), and 80 (b), the release member 7346 reaches the end of the range in which the release member 7346 can rotate relative to the rotary claw member 7347. (Small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2 in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start to come into contact with each other. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79B, the angle between the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 is small when the engagement portion 346d of the release member 7346 is in contact with the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the arcuate plate portion 7610 is formed in a small angle state in which the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320. The disk cam 7344 has a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c are in contact with each other. Arranged (see FIG. 80 (a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member From the 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backflip direction cannot be continued, so that the rotation of the disk cam 7344 is based on the rotation. , The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80 (a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). However, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one equally divided recess 7522 originally arranged to another different equally divided recess 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 The phase with and is rotated relative to each other by the amount of one recess (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. The engaging portion 7630 is again housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is displaced by one.

That is, by going through the process shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into the recessed portion 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82 (a), FIG. 82 (b), FIG. 83 (a) and FIG. 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and other unnecessary parts are not shown.

In FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 82 (a), the state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other is shown, and in FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 is above the release member 7346. FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). In (b), the state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, so that the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clock 82 (a)). When rotating in the clockwise direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Will only be.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 is radially outward until the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the releasing member 7346 and then separates from the engaging member 7344R3. Keep overhanging. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly tilt the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment. In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, the state that is not noticed by the player (the state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place that is not visible to the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is moved up from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disk cam 7344). ) The state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced is shown. , A state in which the disk member 7344R1 is rotated relative to the equally divided recessed portion 7522 by one, and in both FIGS. 84 and 85, the second overhanging portion 344c3 corresponds to the engaging portion 346d. The state of contact is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 from the first state, the tilting device 310 immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced to the rear lower side than the position shown in FIG. Move to a state where it sinks below the 2 state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 immediately reaches (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) by the ascending operation can be changed from the first state. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operating device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operating device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Further, the definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG. 86.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 in a state where the front frame 14 is removed. It is a front view of. In FIG. 90, the reference numeral of the internal configuration of the game board 13 is omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed, with the wooden plate material as the upper side and the lower side and the aluminum plate material as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement park by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 or the like) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. The member may be provided in the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It can rotate forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) when viewed from the front, and the right side is rotated. It can rotate backward as the moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. And, it has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform an unlocking operation. By doing so, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). By engaging the metal plate with holes) with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is recessed in a fitable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape protruding upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (the diameter of the upper columnar in a configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically). Is externally fitted to the support pin 19a (which has a small shape) and is pivotally supported.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (illumination portions 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in the front view (see FIG. 86). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back surface side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And have. The fixed frame is formed of synthetic resin into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the double glazing. Has been done.

The glass unit 16 is colorless and transparently formed by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. The glass unit 16 is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. If the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored transparent instead of colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated portions 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. In these illuminated units 8029 to 8033, lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, the illuminated portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c has a built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls and a light emitting means that lights up during the payout of prize balls.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member formed of punching metal) is provided to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state. .. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged so as to bulge toward the front side and are arranged side by side.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 50 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back surface side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to separately provide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 to store the game balls at a plurality of places, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is provided. Is also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (storage area of the game ball). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen or the like of the third symbol display device 81. The operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as around the lower plate 50 in addition to the upper plate 17, or may be provided in a plurality of places, and is a push button type switch as an operation method. It may be configured so that information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 leading to the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 leading to the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( (See FIG. 92).

In the upper corner portion of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving port portion 143 that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. By partitioning the 143 to the left and right by the partition wall 144, the passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and the passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion of the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that forms a passage for discharging the game balls that have not reached the game area to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with the ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which the unlaunched ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. Is formed like this.

On the back side of the front frame 14, the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge toward the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, there is a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the lighting unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and one end of the internal board of the lighting unit 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic board is disposed to which the other end of the connector to which the portions are connected is connected, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

In the portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring through groove 14h communicating with the left and right illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 and an illuminated portion 8031 through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Is done.

Therefore, assuming that the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illuminated portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conducting wiring and a connector for connecting one end to the internal board of the illuminated parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotation tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 600 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126), the positional relationship is such that they face each other in the front-rear direction with the device on the upper side, and they can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member having an open front side formed of a resin material is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a structure in which the cross-sectional area becomes smaller as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation tip side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a constituting the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring has a structure. The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14 and is arranged opposite to the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. Consists of shape.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is abutted against the front frame 14 like the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame portion 14. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be curved in a semicircle in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upward extending wall portion 173c gently curves in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 rotates from the upper end position of the upward extending wall portion 173c. It overhangs to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and causing a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be broken.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is an upward extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (the part closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), and a part of the main body frame 14a, which is the front frame. On the rotation base end side of 14, an inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion formed of a resin material and is open downward, is disposed between the vertically long plate portions.

The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion that illegally expands the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and enters the game area to take measures against fraudulent acts. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire having a heated tip is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat melts the reverse cup portion 178 and allows the reverse cup portion 178 to pass through the long cover member. It also melts 173. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is detected that the wiring is broken. , Can make it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and is in contact with each other (close to each other). Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the property can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (progresses in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the gaming area.

Further, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who commits fraudulent activity through the piano wire from becoming large, for example, the lower wall portion. By arranging a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the cheating person escapes and to secure the cheating person. ..

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot determine it, so that the piano wire is supposed to be on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window portion 14c), the operation of further inserting the piano wire deeply is naturally performed by a person who cheats (piano wire). Can be done (without suspicion that the insertion is not working). Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the person who commits the fraud notices that the fraud has been discovered and tries to escape.

The detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be arranged on the back side portion of the operation handle 51. When it is arranged on the operation handle 51, for example, the detection device conventionally arranged on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the approach of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a has an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It is equipped with a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward the area between them, and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one on the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the protruding path of the plunger 702 provided as the launching portion in the launching solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electric signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launching unit 112a is not limited to the launching solenoid 701, and a launching motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a substrate 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates the portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side and the lower plate passage portion 162 on the main body side are opened toward the back side so that one end thereof can communicate with the through hole penetrated in the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) so that the end portion of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball discharged from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. To.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the payout ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. The front door side upper plate passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 that regulates the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162. .. The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game ball.

Further, an urging member (coil spring or the like) that urges the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the urging member is attached when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position by the force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is opposed to the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is composed of separate substrates for the locations where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the locations where the connectors CN3 are arranged. This is because the connector CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so that the transmission target is different, so the board is different. This is due to the intention of preventing malfunctions in advance.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components arranged below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled and shown, and FIG. 92 shows the window portion of the front frame 14. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below 14c.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14c, it is the front side of the upper plate 17, and it is diagonally upward to the right of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the front frame 14, and the covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the operation device 300.

The cover cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width similar to the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends, and the main body curved portion 371 having a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and the main body bending thereof. It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at the intermediate position between the left-right center portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side close to each other in the width direction, and merges at the lower end of the extension to form a front view V. A plate-shaped member that closes the opening surrounded by the hanging portion 372 having a character shape, the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372. A translucent portion 373 that is fastened and fixed to at least one of the two, a left plane support portion 374 that is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and a flat surface that is formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. Mainly a right-side plane support portion 375 and a support groove 376 which is a groove recessed from the back surface side in the right-side plane support portion 375 and whose recess width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back surface side. Prepare for.

The curved portion 371 of the main body has a curved front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17 as a back side edge portion, and is an upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The back left edge portion 371a that abuts on the front side edge of 17 in the front-rear direction and the back left edge portion 371a are connected to each other and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. The back middle edge portion 371b that abuts on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction and the back middle edge portion 371b are connected to each other on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation unit 40. It mainly includes a back right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body, and is between the plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported and the right corner cover 380 arranged at the right corner portion of the front frame 14. It is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). In the hanging portion 372, a screw inserted from below is screwed into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed at a position on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, so that the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and producing an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is placed close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are 6 LEDs (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light upward, and 2 LEDs (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light downward. , Each placed.

Among the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then transmits light. Pass through section 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), it is adjusted to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373.

Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 is the first. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed as the state changes from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 that accompanies the change in the state of the tilting device 310. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the illuminated portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat surface support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8031.

The right-side plane support portion 375 abuts vertically with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right flat surface support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination unit 8031, 8032 is used. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portion 8031, the illuminated portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that accepts the lower end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 from entering from the back surface side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illuminated portion 8032 is assumed to have entered the deepest part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right side plane support portion 375. And the position matches.

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illuminated portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. Separate fixing portions for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d is arranged on the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a. The passage forming unit 140 is arranged on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 is fixed to the main body frame 14a or a plate so as to cover the passage forming unit 140 from the back side by fastening and fixing the main body frame 14a to another member (members constituting the upper plate 17 or the like). It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or the main body frame 14a is sandwiched between another member (a member or the like constituting the upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of the synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire having a heated tip, a piano wire, or the like is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 and melted), the front frame It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of the 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire having a heated tip is pressed against it, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side of the front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the upper and lower ends of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the foul ball passage portion Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of the 145, but also when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the exemplified wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. It can be prevented.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified for the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 and a through hole is opened. Even so, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, an exemplary wire is pressed against a portion where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and rear becomes thinner (a portion diagonally above the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a through hole is opened, and a case where the illustrated wire enters is exemplified.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit back member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the cylinder lock 20 is arranged on the operation unit back member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position to be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction mainly by ribs formed in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left-right long plate member. Therefore, a through hole 156 through which the cylinder lock 20 is pierced in the plate member and a screw are formed above and below the through hole 156, and a screw for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 is inserted into the main body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 bored vertically in a portion (left end portion) overlapped on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end rather than a through hole 156. Mainly includes an opening / closing restricting portion 159 projecting to the back side on the side.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is provided on the back surface side with a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. A protruding portion 148a and a screwing portion 148b in which a screw to be inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction is formed as a screwable hole. Mainly prepare.

With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the back surface of the operation unit are formed by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation portion back member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140. be able to.

The L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 into which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed at a right angle and the lower edge. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back surface side so as to partition the area, and the extending wall portion thereof. In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the 148c is formed in an L-shape that can be surfaced with the wall portion 158a in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Therefore, as an alignment when assembling the operation unit back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved up and down with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By contacting the surfaces on the left and right sides, the position and posture of the operation unit back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The open / close restricting unit 159 is a portion that is arranged in front of and behind the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) arranged on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and the details will be described later. Under predetermined conditions, it has an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by coming into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the back surface side of the operation portion back surface member 155 and is formed of synthetic resin, and is a cross section in the extension direction view in order to secure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of other parts of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, since the strength may depend on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible. Since it can be formed by the plate thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, as compared with the flat cross section, it may be a curved (wave) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular corrugated cross section, or a cylindrical cross section.

Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not as a part of the operation unit back member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the back side, or is fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a from another member to the back side. It may be composed of a metal part extending to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is formed of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. It can be prevented from being chipped or dented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the operator who attaches / detaches the game board 13 by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 may be injured by touching the chip or dent formed in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is arranged on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock is further arranged on the rotation tip side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are erroneously locked when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. can.

As a path for a foreign substance such as a wire to enter, for example, a path passing through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is traced.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies electric power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign substance such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured in a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels sick at the game result may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At that time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to be splashed with drinking water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) fail. There is a risk of

Further, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it has a separably independent configuration, it is possible to prevent liquids such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A recessed portion 15a is recessed on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep-bottomed recessed portion. It is not a perfect case, and gaps are formed in places (see, for example, FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps), passing through the inside of the operation device 300 and downward of the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17 (b)), and is further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is transferred to the drive motor 342. It can be hung directly and prevented from breaking down.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that a liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but since the other parts are covered with the bottom plate portion 321, drinking water or the like may be applied. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhering liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

With the above configuration, even if the player on the way back is splashed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. Note that FIGS. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG. 91.

FIG. 93A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 93B, the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and are extended to the left from the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are up to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harness connected to each of the illuminated parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is once arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 heads toward the binding movable member 180 from the relay board, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back surface side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side that faces the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93 (a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the side surface on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93 (a)). At a position (intermediate position) between the pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions arranged on the side surface) and can lock the binding arm portions 183, and the pair of binding arm portions 183. It mainly includes a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and having an opening.

The binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than that of the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section having a substantially horseshoe-shaped upper side and a fixed portion 181a having a through hole for passing a screw in the center, and the fixed portion 181a projecting from the left and right lower corners to the plate member 14d side, respectively. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b to be provided, and an intermediate stopper portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front end portion of the fixed portion 181a and having the extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96A), and a portion arranged on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d. It mainly includes a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of detent portions 181b at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thereby, the binding movable member 180 can be prevented from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the posture of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing with respect to the plate member 14d can be determined.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d and the harness HN1 to HN3. In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extending end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding downward, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area of the region accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (the region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stop portion 181c) is secured while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e is internally fitted into the portion on the base end side of the movable arm portion 182 to provide the movable arm portion 182. Axial support (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly connected to the flat surface OS1 offset from the shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape connected to the opposite side of the axial support position of the base end portion 182a are mainly provided.

The base end portion 182a is the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connecting the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the most with the plane OS1) in the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape portion outerly fitted to the cylinder fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the direction of rotation are extended from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the distance between them gradually shortens as the distance from each other approaches the plane OS1. It becomes the same as the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained to have higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept not intended for elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept intended for elastic deformation (low rigidity) depending on the situation. ..

Since each pair of the binding arm portions 183 has the same shape, one of them will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, the narrow portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion having a width equal to the width of the root and the wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. The binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 in the fixed state (see FIG. 93 (b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a slightly larger thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93 (b)), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 184a, and has an opening width wider than that of the large opening 184a. It mainly comprises a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized so that the binding arm 183 can pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. The large width portion 183b is set to a size that cannot be passed (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to operate relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). When it is desired to lock the binding arm portion 183 to the locking portion 184, the size (tightening condition) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging the binding arm portion 183 on the side of the small opening portion 184b. Can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided with a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted and fixed through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185. , Harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of 14.

Note that FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b) show a state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one of the limit states of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) show. In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing in the vertical direction). This angle is normally used in view of the installation situation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the game store (the situation where the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14.

Therefore, in normal use, the movable arm portion 182 may exceed the range in which the movable arm portion 182 can rotate with respect to the main body portion 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates due to elastic deformation and breaks.

Next, support modes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

Note that, in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown, and in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. To. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extension wall portion 173c is the same, it was extended from the upper extension wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e which is the axial support position of the movable arm portion 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c. The shape of the HN3 can be made to follow the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the shape of the bent portion of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature, particularly in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B). This makes it possible to prevent disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also has a rotation center point P57 as a center with respect to the inner frame 12 as in the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since the frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be opened and closed, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 96 (FIG. 96). b), also see FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed through the vicinity of a vertically long metal portion (a portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 96 (d)) constituting the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are fitted when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the fit (which is curved only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Depending on the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted and penetrated through the wire, and the wire is advanced toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out, and continuity is disabled.

Fraud can be quickly detected by controlling the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burnt out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the fraudulent activity is committed until the fraudulent activity is discovered (the early detection of the fraudulent activity can be achieved).

In this case, after the wire is inserted into the game area and the game area is tampered with (for example, after bending the nail to make it easier to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to launch a ball to a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent giving an illegal benefit. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burnt out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a risk that a person who commits fraudulent acts will not be able to collect the bills and the remaining amount of balls inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his or her fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, if you want to commit fraud by eliminating the risk of not being able to collect the bills and the balance of the cards inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, the fraudulent activity will be performed without leaving the seat, so that the pachinko / pachislot machine store can easily notice the fraudulent activity.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output. At the gaming machine store, the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed. As a result, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be easily grasped.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. The lower end portion of the ball guide opening 53 is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50, respectively. Each of the S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 is provided with the extension direction facing (switching) at least once on both the left and right sides.

Since the S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, it stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86). Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed in the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of replenishing the balls given to the player (when the balls in the lower plate 50 minutes are exhausted, the balls are removed from the Senryobako box. A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress) due to being required to be replenished or the like can be configured.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 each include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions whose extension directions can be bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. It has features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged on the downstream side of the first bending region NEa1 and on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. The region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 has a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. , Equipped with. In the description of the feature portion, the feature of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. , The ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na, and the side wall Na extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the extending end portion. The proximity walls Nc and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc are mainly provided, and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc extend from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by forming the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb so as to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface of the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) opposite to the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire, small diameter metal represented by piano wire, etc.). It functions as a surface, but the details will be described later. In the proximity wall Nc, the distance between the gap Nin and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an approach route for the wire HM to be illegally inserted, a route traveling to the upstream side of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance can be considered. A person who commits a fraudulent act will proceed while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a cheating person, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 inverted left and right, the wire HM can be completely entered into the gap Nin.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from further progressing, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held, and it is possible to quickly detect fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and further progresses, if the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM overhangs in a downward posture, so that the wire HM is further advanced. Even so, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the gaming area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). By forcibly opening the movable device such as the above to make it easier to win a prize illegally, it is possible to obtain an illegal payout ball and prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

It will be described back to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (more than twice in the present embodiment). As a result, when the sphere flowing down the ball removing passage 147 is arranged in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the spheres simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility that the balls are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that vertically connects the respective bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The left-right width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage portion 145a is formed so that the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 projects downward toward the front side.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage portion 140 is positioned as a surface position with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of the above is positioned with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a larger front-rear width in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when a ball stays in the foul ball passage portion 145, the number of balls that can stay can be increased because a plurality of balls can be arranged so as to be displaced back and forth in the upstream of the passage portion 145. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly displaced from side to side and up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being pinched and engaged between the upper and lower walls.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow bottom surface of the ball faces to the right. From the inclined plate portion 146a that inclines downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that is extended in a plate shape toward the back surface side and curves in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward toward the back surface side.

While the ball is guided to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 146 to be on the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a and flows down can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be done.

Thereby, the period until the ball passing through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While setting the width of the 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

Since the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a), the outer shape is larger than that. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed long to the left and right, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 118) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

This makes it possible to connect and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 to each other by fastening and fixing them to the main body frame 14a, while eliminating the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling to the main body frame 14a is defined in the order of fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500 and then fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are provided with the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. It is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other to the left and right by the configuration in which the portions are sandwiched and fitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are the main body frames. The state decomposed from 14a is shown.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is a recessed portion 462,482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side thereof, and the upper frame is formed by fastening the screw through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. It is a part for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole formed in the main body frame 14a, is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As an actual assembly procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIGS. 108 and 108. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 108, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 109, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R which are overlapped in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and the main body frame is formed. It mainly includes a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion 510 that is fastened and fixed to 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side, and in that state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed into an L-shaped cross section by extending the extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side in a plate shape, and is in an assembled state. In (see FIG. 86), the fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a and the substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, and a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512. It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 is provided with a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the board member 512 in a front view and the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the substrate member is in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

Since the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115B), the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are oriented in the left-right direction. It is possible to suppress the collapse of the. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the postures of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 511a is displaced to the right side by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 rather than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extended portion 511a is displaced. The outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the back side end portion as a surface at substantially the surface position with the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back side end portion of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end portion of the support plate portion 510, and the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of.

The substrate member 512 is an electronic circuit board (printed circuit board) in which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row curved according to the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. .. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the light guide member 540 are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see FIG. 107 imaginary line), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak to the light guide member. It is incident on the 540 and emitted from any surface of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 527.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The left-right width of the pin support hole 515 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate portion 510 from the front side in a fastening ready state, the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically and vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (protruding portion 566). The protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even if the position is displaced up and down by about the diameter of the above. As a result, after the protrusion 566 is inserted through the pin support hole 515, the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are moved up and down by the amount of the misalignment with respect to the support plate 510 to eliminate the misalignment and easily fasten. Can be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L comprises an inner cover member 520 formed of a resin material that constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is opaque to light, and an inner cover member 520 thereof. An inner lens member 530, which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material, is provided.

The right heavy plate unit 500R comes into contact with the light guide member 540 arranged to face the left heavy plate unit 500L in the left-right direction, and the front side end portions are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction and light. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and formed of a non-transmissive resin material. Mainly includes an outer cover member 560 to be fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 110, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 111, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown, respectively, and the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 which is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. The lower fastening portion 523, which is arranged at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and inserted into the inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions to be formed and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and an inner lens member 530 formed longer than the short fastening portion 525. A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of long fastening portions 526 which are inserted into the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and are projected from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

In the main body plate portion 521, the front side end portion 521a has a wave shape, and the connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in the short width portion (the portion closer to the back side) of the wave shape. To prepare for.

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that abuts (matches the shape) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion arranged so as to be inclined to the left toward the back surface side, and the opening portion 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals above and below, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect of light can be made different for each opening 524.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and is provided with a pair of fastening portions 522a juxtaposed in the front-rear direction and recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. It is provided with a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is screwed through at two places at the upper end portion and at one place at the lower end portion, and is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four upper and lower positions and function as a window for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed from a curved shape that projects to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back surface side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in the present embodiment, the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is recessed and curved to the right in the design shape between the above-mentioned boundary portions. That is, the surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is formed from a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the front surface side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a recess that tends to be a dead space is formed on the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a wave shape in which the front side end portion 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically long plate shape substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. Will be done.

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending to the right from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction. It also has support holes 531b and 531c through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in a corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back surface side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

The support hole 531c is formed in a corrugated rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can abut with the light guide member 540 is arranged on the back surface side thereof. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied in the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction so as to allow the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, it is possible to align the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and has a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending to the right from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. A plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction are mainly provided.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a and the light guide member 540. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that projects to the left toward the back side like the inner cover member 520, the left-right width becomes longer toward the back side (front end portion in top view). (Triangle shape with the tip).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 formed so as to project to the left from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, which is convex in a wavy shape and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a grid pattern on both the left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate that is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is turned to the left and right through the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The lens. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back surface side (LED 512a side) to the front surface side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing the light from the so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notched concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to be emitted from the surface of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but a transparent resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, and an amorphous olefin resin are preferable. Examples thereof include resins, polystyrene-based resins, and AS resins (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compounds). Of these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain a light guide member 540 having a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the LED 512a side end of the light guide member 540 is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed from a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end portion is slightly displaced toward the back side from the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530, and is formed from side to side. Is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. The degree of wavy shape is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that has less distortion after thermal bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and can be given a three-dimensional degree of freedom. ..

The details of the wave shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520 is located to the left and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. It has a wavy shape that is located to the right (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the two.

As described above, the wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material on which the concave portion is formed. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) curved in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + 10 to 40 ° C. It is done by pressing the substrate against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not destroyed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process. It is possible to suppress fluctuations in the reflection angle of. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 is inserted with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate and screws extending in the vertical direction from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560. Mainly includes a fastening portion 542 to be formed.

The light guide member 540 has no portion penetrating in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no holes at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The back side end portion of the light guide member 540 is positioned substantially on the back side end portion of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is arranged at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in the shape of a long plate vertically and the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. An outer cover that projects to the right in a region surrounded by an inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and the plurality of insertion holes 553. An overhanging portion 554 that is visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a protrusion from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear ends follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551a extending to the left from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wavy shape and is arranged so as to be slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. To.

The front end portion 551a is convex to the front side at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of protrusions internally fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). A setting portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the light guide member 540 on the opposite side, bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) that bulge in a semicircular shape in a side view toward the front side are vertically arranged. It is formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be a band-shaped light emission mode in which the light is continuously connected vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a deep recessed portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554. As a result, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the back surface fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is arranged in the outer lens member 550, but not in the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close to the right side edge of the support plate portion 510 (outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) as much as possible (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the arrangement of the screws). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

In the main body plate portion 551, the surface on the side facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and the light guide member is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The 540 and the main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 114 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 from being displaced from each other, and light is accurately incident from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. Can be made to.

The outer cover member 560 is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the main body plate portion 561 formed in the shape of a long plate vertically and the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. There are a plurality of elongated holes formed in an oval shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and the screw is inserted from the opposite side. At the upper end portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561, it is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and is the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastened portion 563 having a screw receiving portion 563a formed with a slightly larger vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561. A receiving surface that can accept the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 at the front end portion of the above, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a vertical width thereof. It is formed with a long hole shape with a long width, and an opening is formed with a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted from the opposite side and an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of projecting portions 566 projecting from the main body plate portion 561 toward the back surface side.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the covering cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to project to the front side. Even if it can be stably supported, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted inside (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, since the path to access the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

A method of assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a), FIG. 113 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a).

It should be noted that FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the convex portion 551b is arranged on the back surface side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the convex portion. The state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112B). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are arranged at the front side end portion of the right panel unit (front side of the front side surface of the light guide member 540). Since the number of screws for fastening and fixing the light can be reduced, and thereby the area where the light is blocked by the screws can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It can be made easy to see in a band shape.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously guided at the time of fastening. By applying a load to the optical member 540, it is possible to reduce the range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end (near the tapered tip) of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the left heavy plate unit 500L is combined with the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530. The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R constitutes a surface having a parallel relationship with each other along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship capable of contacting each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when the left heavy plate unit 500L is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. The panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are respectively fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and at least two procedures can be considered for the assembling procedure. ..

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, after that, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is right-weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing to the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, it is possible to assemble and disassemble in two steps, so the worker who performs maintenance etc. disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 by which procedure depending on the part of the part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the work time can be shortened.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid to each other in the plane direction in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid from each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted, the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit is united. It is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that travel inside the 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are fastened to the front surface. The left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R cannot be disassembled unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104). Can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that travel through the inside of the right panel unit 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. .. In addition, in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c), the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back surface side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right due to the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114 (b)), light is condensed on the side that forms the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side that forms the convex shape. For example, at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape having a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524. It can be used for directing by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (condensed or diffused) of the light effect executed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided and the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, the mode of light production on both the left and right sides can be different. ..

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also becomes the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the vertical width increases as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is smaller. , The radius of curvature is shorter than R2 (R1> R2> R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LED 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be generated can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light as compared with the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed in the same manner as the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1) and is the center of the concave surface. The shape is such that the normal line coming out of is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower end openings 524 can be increased, the light effect can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be directed to the player's eyes. It can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the openings 524 arranged to face each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 to be arranged facing each other with the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower opening 524 is formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the radius of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the radius of curvature R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, in a place where the degree of light focusing is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light is collected. In a place where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid excessive light incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the light emission mode of each opening 524 uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114B are points corresponding to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. It is placed in the middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary region KE of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is defined as a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the upper end of the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the lower end thereof. Matches the top edge of. Therefore, the light radiated from the LED 512a in the front-rear direction to the region KE travels in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114 (c)).

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the light condensing action is reduced, the light is visually recognized by the player. The difference in the amount of light is small.

On the other hand, by forming the light guide member 540 into a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface in the region KE, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. The durability of the light can be improved.

Further, by forming a convex shape to the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

For example, by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 without any gap. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from the vertical position of the region KE intersects at the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being darkly visually recognized in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary portion of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made to.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The effect may be performed by using the light that reaches the front end portion.

That is, a light effect that is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c but is visible through the front end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared. However, by setting the high hit expectation of the effect, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 from the front side end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree to which the player's eyes get tired can be reduced, and the player can play for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when visually recognized from the left side surface, while is visually recognized by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, and the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by a visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player can escape. Can be prevented.

By inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

FIG. 115 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end surface (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end portion on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to have a length of 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and has the same gradient in the left-right width dimension over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end face of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face becomes long, it is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower portions near the support hole 531b and arranged at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by, the portion near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is better than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that receives the light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is increased, and the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531b is increased. It is possible to reduce the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. As a result, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front side end portion of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform (small difference in strength) with the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the foremost surface. )can do.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an arrow of an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of forming the light guide member 540 to be curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is diffused and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of curving the light guide member 540. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LED 512a that generates the light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant, the light emission mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not right beside the inner lens member 530 but is formed on the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (See the arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b). The arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

It will be described back to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. A unit fitted to (see) and supported from below, which is located at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 thereof. An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , Mainly prepared. Note that in FIGS. 117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is not shown (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated to indicate a model name or the like, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light to produce a light effect.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending horizontally from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the tubular shape. A cylindrical portion 405 whose shape is formed through the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 which are arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly prepared.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open sides, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is arranged on an electronic board, and the electronic board is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. It is a part that improves sex.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical misalignment of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. A horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed in a concave portion on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410.

The tubular portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is possible. Formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and is formed of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L, which is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner portion of the main body member 411, and the main body member 411 from the back side to the position where the opening 414 projects to the front side. It is mainly provided with a lens member 440 that is inserted and pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back surface side to prevent it from falling off to the back surface side and constitutes the illumination portion 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long left and right member in which openings for passing vibration waves (voice) generated from the speaker assembly 450 are formed on both left and right sides, and a speaker cover 27 is arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the lighting unit 401 are larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 formed through a slightly large inner shape and an opening 414 formed through the upper right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed with substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, when the illumination unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410, the alignment in the left-right direction can be easily performed.

The support through hole 413 is inserted through the tubular portion 405 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). As a result, the wiring overhanging through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back surface side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring to which one end is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached and detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that makes the lens member 440 visible in front view. The LED 14e2 is arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape on the back surface side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back surface side on the lower right corner lower surface, and a concave portion from the back surface side on the left corner lower end surface. A supported groove 418 to be supported, a fastening portion 419 which is arranged symmetrically in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that a screw can be screwed in, and a second screw which is formed so as to be screwable in a position closer to the top and bottom. Mainly includes a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the lower edge plate member 420 at the opposite position (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily perform positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state thereof (see FIG. 86). ), The load (weight, etc.) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the illuminated portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is formed through the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight, etc.) given from the above can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where screws inserted into through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is projected in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. It is provided with an enlarged rib 419a to be formed.

As will be described later, the expansion rib 419a has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e attached to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. It is a part sandwiched between and (see FIG. 125 (a)), but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, in the enlarged rib 419a, ribs having the same shape are arranged at three positions around the fastening portion 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view on the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and the wavy wall portion 422 thereof. After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extending upward from the extending end portion and forming an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421. It mainly includes an opening 424 composed of a plurality of small-diameter through holes that are arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the center position of the left and right (upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate in the vertical direction.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a are in contact with each other at the top and bottom, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is an opening in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) through which a vibration wave (sound) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 is passed (exhausted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 which are circular openings for passing vibration generated toward the front side in the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed through the upper frame member 410 at a position corresponding to the opening 414 in the front-rear direction. The light radiated to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is visible to the player through the opening 414.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends. It is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e at the lower end portion. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R has a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device that converts an electric signal into an audible audio wave so that it can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is inserted. After forming a space between the front assembly 460, which is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front assembly 460, which is formed with an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in the front view (see FIG. 100). Mainly includes a side assembly 480.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and at the same time, emits a production sound in connection with the game, and one end thereof is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connecting wire 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire composed of a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the terminal of the speaker connecting wire 453. By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the speaker lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with the front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front portion of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received. You can play back and output with high sound quality without making it. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 has a main body portion 461 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and the back side is open, and a plurality of recessed portions of the main body portion 461 from the upper and lower side edges toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip. Extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 462 and the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the outside in the vertical width. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end portion of the main body portion 461 to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner portion of the main body portion 461 in the front-rear direction, and a main body portion 461. A through hole 466 that is circularly penetrated through the speaker 451 on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 that are ribbed from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and rear. A connection hole 469 through which a plurality of fastening portions 468 to be fastened and fixed with screws inserted into the side assembly 480 and screws for co-fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. And a front side recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back surface side to the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 has a base end side main body portion 461B arranged on the side where the through hole 466 is formed as a region divided in the left-right direction, and a center side in the left-right direction of the base end side main body portion 461B (FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M connected to the left side) and a tip side main body portion 461T connected to the center side in the left-right direction (left side of FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body portion 461M. The base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal end side main body portion 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between the base end side main body portion 461B and the rear end side assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds almost the entire circumference of the outer shape in the front view thereof. The back side wall portion 461H is provided with an inwardly non-returned edge portion (an edge portion in which a flange or the like is not formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Will be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screw inserted through the through hole 463a is inserted from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and the through hole 483a and the through hole 483a of the rear side assembly 480. It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened enough to tighten the screw. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a by sandwiching the upper side plate member 14e (fastening and fixing to the hard material by sandwiching the resin material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed to be smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is visually illustrated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed. The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. As a result, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed.

The passage forming rib 467 abuts tightly in front and behind the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 and bends multiple times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). It is a rib that forms. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being created on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protrudes outward from the outer shape).

The rear side assembly 480 is recessed in a semicircular tip toward the center of the vertical width from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 formed in a cup shape that is long left and right and the front side is open. A plate-like extension plate extending from the back side edge of the plurality of recessed portions 482 and the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 from the vertical width outward. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner of the main body portion 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped main body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side in a rib shape and a through hole through which a screw is inserted at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction are formed through. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes 488 and a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed from the front side to the back side at a position corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction.

The main body 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer circumference of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the back side plate, and the front assembly 460. It is provided with a front side wall portion 481H formed from a shape internally fitted to the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer circumference thereof, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are projected toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right at intervals that allow the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. It is equipped with 481Ha.

The auxiliary convex portion 481Ha is a pair of convex portions that prevent the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surface of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha has a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the wiring passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 is provided with a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screw inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and penetrates the through hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended to the extent that the screws are tightened by screwing the screws inserted into the through holes 483a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is projected along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 and is formed with a width that is internally fitted into the wiring passage recess 464, and is larger than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The speaker connection wire 453 is convexly provided with a convex length slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

That is, by passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the opening formed by being surrounded by 464 and the speaker connecting line 453. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing the speaker connection line 453.

The light passage through hole 485 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed from a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), The light passage through holes 465 and 485 communicate with each other in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 are formed in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib forming a bending passage (see FIG. 123) that bends by turning. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is formed at the front and rear end portions and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the back side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the back side plate of the main body portion 481. This prevents a gap from being created on the back surface side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed so that the front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at that time. That is, a compressive force toward the back surface side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 are elastically deformed in the front-rear direction to close the gap between them. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and may be bent to the left or right, the compressive force does not work well and there is a possibility that the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, the back surface is overlapped in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). It can be reinforced by the strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be done.

The rear concave portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front concave portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front concave portion 471. The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protruding outward from the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening of the opening 424. It is placed in a position that surrounds the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), for ease of understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 arranged to face each other face each other. Is shown in the unfolded state toward the front side of the paper. That is, by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically at the center of the left and right sides of the paper, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the back side of the base end side main body portion 461B of the front assembly 460. It is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the front end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately arranged vertically toward the left side. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are provided at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment).

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed at the time of assembly. It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

Since each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, the rigidity of the main body portion 461 is strengthened by the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. Can be done.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bending passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back surface side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the oscillating wave generated from the speaker 451 travels linearly, but in the present embodiment, the oscillating wave Ws avoids the passage forming rib 467. It will proceed.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is on the left side (arrow) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) arranged on the L side and closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the lower side, and is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion closest to the left and right direction). , Rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are alternately arranged vertically as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent vertically. It is possible to secure a longer path length of the vibration wave Ws as compared with the left-right width of the space.

This makes it easy to adjust the path length until the oscillating wave Ws passes through the opening formed from the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and suppresses the generation of a standing wave by the oscillating wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be caused by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front side recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b located above the recessed portion 461 on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction of (arrows L and U).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the recessed portion 462 and 463b.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that presses the wiring, and are formed at a plurality of locations (this) alternately up and down toward the left side. In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are provided at five locations).

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity of the main body portion 481 is strengthened by the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. Can be done.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). (See), they are arranged facing each other in the front-rear direction.

Since the actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be caused by the recessed portions 482, 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed on the upper left between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear side recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b above the recessed portion 482 arranged on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in a direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482, 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembly.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed down at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are arranged vertically. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position further away from the speaker 451 and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so that the output is output from the back side of the speaker 451. The generated vibration wave Ws (speaker) travels toward the tip side main body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an outlet. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T sequentially passes through the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120). As you can see, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the back portion of the speaker 451 is an opening and an opening 424 formed by an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, recessed portions 471, 491 (that is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box. Since it is in direct contact with the outside atmosphere of the pachinko machine 8010 via (see FIG. 120), the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 should be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being disturbed. Can be done.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is recessed 471, 491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out in the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase with each other. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can produce a realistic effect, and can raise the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In the present embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The internal space of the 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 to produce the game by the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws as a path for avoiding the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is stipulated. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extension length in the vertical direction, the vibration wave Ws (sound). ) Sound can be tuned.

In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480 are provided in addition to the above purposes. It is arranged in a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can be reinforced in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by arranging the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed in.

Further, the extended plates 436 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125 (a)), and the rib portions 467c and 487c, respectively. The 467d and 487d are arranged on the extension plate 433 and 483 side of the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the fastening portion 419 is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 433 and 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other to bring the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 and the rear. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portion 462,482 is a portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is positioned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is attached to the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, so that the recessed portions 14e1 are recessed. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and it is possible to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

In such a fraudulent act, a wire, a piano wire, or the like is illegally invaded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is the front recessed portion 471. In addition to being formed in a closed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage recess 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is inserted through an opening different from the inserted portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e with the tip protruding from the 450.

In addition, the through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speaker 451. It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which are the points where the above and the like are allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even when such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is easy to prevent the profit of the fraudulent act.

124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R in the CXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 124 (c). Is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124 (a). be. In addition, in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is shown. Is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the back side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side. The outer surface 481Ho (upper surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side and is fitted to the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that. This makes it possible to improve the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c is elastically deformed by receiving a compressive load from the rib portion 467c. Since the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed so that a compressive load is generated between the rib portions that abut each other.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (narrow) the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass in the intermediate main body portion 461M as compared with the tip side main body portion 461T. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the tip side main body portion 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front side concave portion 471 and the rear side concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body portion 461M. It is secured to a large extent in a manner that bulges in the front-back direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the tip side main body portion 461T and emitted at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear the deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

125 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVa-CXXXV line of FIG. 124 (a). b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of FIG. 124 (a).

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the screw inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to be fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419. It is a portion that sandwiches the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the expansion rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , Front side assembly 460, rear side assembly 480, upper side plate member 14e and metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is fastened at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (passing through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), whereby the front assembly 460 and the rear are assembled. It is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without going through the side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are co-tightened to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the back surface side is disposed inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the playback output is output from the speakers 451 arranged in the other speaker assembly 450R and 450L. It is possible to avoid conflict with the sound to be played, and to reproduce the reproduced sound with high quality as a transparent sound without disturbing the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are brought into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 125 (a)), while the speaker assembly 450 At the lower part, the back surface of the rear side assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480. The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) on the entire surface with respect to the upper side plate member 14e, but is in a contact mode in which line contact is made particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, since the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed by synthetic resin), but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that is done.

For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be disposed, or a glass member may be disposed. A member made of concrete may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or another commercially available member may be arranged.

In particular, when a metal member is arranged, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add thickness to the sound.

Further, it is desirable that the member has a high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like fall under this category. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, regarding the shape, it may be projected in the shape of a long plate, may be projected in the shape of a spike, or may be projected in a manner of being scattered in a rounded tip. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to the case where they are fixed, and may be connected in a floating shape.

The arrangement of the portion that functions as the insulator described above is not limited to the back surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450.

For example, when arranging on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a tubular shape, is arranged between the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator, and it functions as a rear assembly 480, an upper side plate member 14e, and an insulator depending on the tightening of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the degree of contact with the members (loads applied to each other) and adjust the acoustic effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) and the connecting hole 469 thereof. The upper side by a through hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in shape and a through hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be fastened is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, in the fastening and fixing of the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 is not loaded. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened and fixed. It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be said to the relationship between the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and the relationship of contact can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. Note that FIG. 127 (b) shows the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b are separated back and forth for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward toward the left from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, a front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a cup shape in which the central portion is open is formed. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end arranged inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting to the front side toward the left in a state of natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 and the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a form a tapered shape that expands to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. As a result, the workability when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line of FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) are board surface support devices 600. It is a side view of the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 which schematically showed the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128 (a) shows the game board 13 whose left end portion has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. 128 (b) and 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly is completed on the inner frame 12, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly on the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding, some configurations of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the left end of the game board 13 is adjusted. The portion is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture of being rotated around an axis facing in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is supported. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve workability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). Rotate it so that it is close to the inner frame 12. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. As a result, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-shaped portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is provided in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the trailing edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the leading edge of the guide rib 12c1 in the top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly advanced by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side portion. .. Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the rear inclination at the time of installation of the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the rotating front claw member 620 and the regulated front claw member 630 (a portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to evacuate from the route, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the rear claw member 640 after rotation via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by changing to a fixed state. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not abut on the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (game). The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 126). Therefore, for example, the game board. When the right end of 13 is not sufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in the fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed in to close the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) with respect to the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end portion is fixed by the board surface support device 600, and the lower end portion is vertically positioned on the support bottom portion 12c. Is regulated.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end portion on the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board that is arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back surface is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection of the game board 13 in the rotation direction. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower surfaces are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, the description of one board support device 600 will be described and the description of the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. In addition, in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13 is shown, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board surface support device 600 is used. The release state in which the fixing of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 600 is rotatable to a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A regulated front claw member rotatably supported by a rotary front claw member 620 that is pivotally supported and a second shaft member P62 that is arranged on the front side of the rotary front claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the rotary front claw member 620. It mainly includes a 630 and a rear claw member 640 that is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 that is arranged on the back surface side of the rotary front claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the rotary front claw member 620.

The frame member 610 is a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. The arc recess 614 is recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along the arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back surface side of the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615 and a pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615a that extend from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and are fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). Mainly includes a fixing plate 616 of the above.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed. , Fixed in the support hole 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the rotary front claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotary front claw member 620 is a part of the main body plate portion 621 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621 thereof. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed to penetrate in a straight line through the plate portions 621a that are arranged facing each other on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the upper corner portion on the front side of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports that are formed through in a straight line on the back side portion of the plate portion 621a and the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. Mainly provided with a hole 624.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the regulated front claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotating claw member 640.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides, and is composed of a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction and an extension portion 621a2 that extends in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view, a connecting plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b. The back side extension plate 621c is extended by inclining downward by about 45 degrees, and extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a from the back side end portion of the extension portion 621a2 toward the plate portion 621a on the opposite side. The front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d and the lower end portion of the hanging back plate portion 621d to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d. And mainly prepare.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be at right angles to each other.

The rear extending plate 621c is arranged so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb on the lower surface thereof. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134 (a)). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb begins to come into contact with the main body plate portion 611.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in the direction in which the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction in which the lower end portion of the post-rotation claw member 640 is separated from the back side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The regulation front claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate portion 631 formed in a side view shape by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. A pair of supported holes 632 that are formed through the plate portion 631a to be formed through the plate portion 631a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portions 631a are inclined toward the front side. It mainly includes an inclined extending plate 633 that is extended and a curved surface 634 that is curved and formed as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), whereby the free posture change of the regulation front claw member 630 is restricted.

The rotating rear claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and is pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in the released state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the tilt angle is such that the back surface of the game board 13 is in contact with the surface. It is formed.

134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process of changing the board surface support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. Further, in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), the board surface support device 600 is fixed to the multifunction cover member 171 and the board surface support device 600 arranged in close proximity to each other. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, FIG. 134 (a) shows the released state of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) shows the fixed state of the board surface support device 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 by simply pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the back side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward from the first shaft member P61). Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the regulation front claw member 630 is subjected to an urging force in a direction close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the regulated front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 is restricted by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the regulated front claw member 630 and the regulating rod 615.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotating front claw member 620 The front side on which the extending portion 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the regulated front claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner that it separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, from the time when the regulation rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a which is the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects the circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (FIG. 134 (a)). In (up to 135 (a)), the front end of the regulated front claw member 630 rises as the rotating front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the regulated front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the rotating front claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resisting portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. When the regulation rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the regulation front claw member 630 is canceled and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the regulation front claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

In the angle range (the range between FIGS. 134 (a) and 135 (a)) in which the regulated front claw member 630 rises and operates, the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630 is relative to the regulated front claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, the attitude change of the regulated front claw member 630 when operating due to the downward load changes the attitude toward the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). (Posture change), so that the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back extension plate 621c, so that the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a downward load to the regulated front claw member 630. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from tilting. In this embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship with the inclined extending plate 633 of the regulation front claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. This makes it possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Here, in the case of a structure in which the rotating front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 is arranged. Depending on the mode of contact between the multifunctional cover member 171 and the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. There is a possibility that it will happen.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13. There is a possibility that the distance will be shortened and the game will be hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional functions arranged on the front frame 14 are arranged. When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 notice that the board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

When the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state immediately before the rotary front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 and the regulation front claw arranged on the front frame 14 Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state or the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively). The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunction cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the regulated front claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), The regulation front claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the game board 13 restricts the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 in the state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed, the front end portion of the rotation front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at the position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the clerk to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, the game board 13 is 90% stable. When the situation that the front frame 14 is not closed is solved, and in this case, a load is applied to the board surface support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14. In addition, the board surface support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged so as to be in contact with the board surface support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 134 (a). ), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the game board 13 displaces the rear claw member 640, and the rotation front claw member 620 is rotated accordingly to change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since the downward load is not applied to the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d, so that the rotating front claw member 620 is passed through the rotating rear claw member 640. The urging force of the torsion spring NBb given to the game board 13 is applied as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the regulation front claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistive portion 634b is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the rotating front claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is used as the center. The non-resisting portion 634b abuts on the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases by that amount.

Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is located from the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) toward the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius gradually increases around the biaxial member P62.

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunction cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), and the second shaft member P62 is displaced due to the rotation of the rotary front claw member 620. The non-resistive portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given to the regulation front claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. 135 The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship in which the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the regulated front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Even so, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 is restricted to the front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. After that, the board surface support device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. That is, in a state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not abut on the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is the multifunction cover member 171. It is possible to operate while avoiding the interference of (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when the board surface is replaced). , The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board surface support device 600 is released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward on the front surface to rotate the regulated front claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the regulation front claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force and the rotation is continued as it is. By doing so, the board surface support device 600 can be released.

When the board surface support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the displaced rear claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front-back position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the back side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the released state.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to a change in the state of the board support device 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are different from each other. , There is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the regulated front claw member 630 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the operation of the rotation front claw member 620 and the rotation rear claw member 640. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member supporting the game board 13 are compared with the amount of displacement of the regulated front claw member 630. The amount of displacement of 640 is smaller.

Therefore, when the regulated front claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the regulated front claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return to the regulated rod 615 is restricted), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the rear claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the rotation front claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the rear claw member 640 rotates against the urging force of the torsion spring NBb and the front claw member 620 rotates. It is possible to displace in the direction of widening the angle between the rotating claw member 640 and the claw member 640.

Therefore, compared to the displacement amount of the rotation front claw member 620, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out to the rotation rear claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the game board at the position supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of 13. As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is shown in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is shown.

Further, in FIG. 136, the released state of the board surface support device 600, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, and in FIG. 138, the board surface support device 600 is at a predetermined angle (about 25 °) from the released state to the fixed state side. ) In FIG. 139, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is shown, and the plate thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

From FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing restricting unit 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is removed, but when the game board 13 is arranged, the front frame 14 is closed. Is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, since the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the rotation front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 138). The opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation direction of the rotating front claw member 620 is due to the action of the regulating rod 615. (Fig. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (Fig. 138 counterclockwise direction) are opposite, so the reaction force becomes excessive, so it is difficult to do with a normal load. As described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, it is restricted to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the extension plate 621c on the back side may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closure of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the rotary front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 , Interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

Further, in this state, when the rotating front claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is caused by the action of the regulation rod 615. The direction (clockwise in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (counterclockwise in FIG. 138) are not opposite to each other, and can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above. Yes (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front claw member 630 can be pushed through the opening / closing restricting portion 159 to fix the board surface support device 600. Therefore, it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Note that FIGS. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back surface of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then flipped back and forth. .. That is, in FIG. 143 (b), the back side of only the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a is a base member centered on a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting and a right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The shaft is rotatably supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) that partially covers the front surface of the 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23 (a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. Mainly includes a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 by a hook or the like that elastically deforms, is arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and is a base member 711 formed of a synthetic resin or the like. To regulate the posture of the launching solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the launching rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launching solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A plurality of fastening portions 716, which are cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed. A mounting hole 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 are mainly provided.

The foundation member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which a rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted in the right corner portion, and a locking portion 713 in which a hook portion 723 is sewn so as to be able to be locked on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. The convex portion 714, which is projected on the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and the suction force generating solenoid 741 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)) are arranged to face each other. It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the metal member for cutting 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), and is inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane that is opposite to the facing plane 714a on the left and right sides, and is inclined to the right toward the back side. Mainly provided with a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( (Floating from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is in contact with the cover member 721 and is formed at a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the suction force is applied to the clerk. It is possible to notice that the generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened. Therefore, before the failure of the ball launching unit 112a occurs, repair (the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed.

The ball feeding device 720 has a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the foundation member 711, a regulated state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144). It mainly comprises a switching device 740 that is controlled to change state depending on the allowable state that allows the flow to the launch rail 730.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) is open from the light-transmitting resin material, and the cover member 721 is loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes through the rod-shaped portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722. A ball passage opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 arranged in a positional relationship slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passage opening 724. It mainly includes a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

The switching device 740 is a member made of synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726 and the suction force generation solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and the suction force generation solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not it is present, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the suction force generating solenoid 741, and a ball. A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward toward the distance from the ball passing opening 724, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. It is mainly provided with a regulated overhanging portion 745 which is extended by a sufficient interval and whose extending end projects toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 726.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage that can guide the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and includes a flow plate portion 724a that descends and inclines in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the radial direction of rotation. The rib portion 724b, which is arranged facing above the flow plate portion 724a and is extended downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape and is inclined downward as the extended tip surface toward the back surface side, and the flow plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c which is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), the sphere P8 abuts on the inclined surface 714b and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the line. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the cutting metal member 725 in a manner separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal are arranged while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged so as to project inside the sphere passage opening 724. It is possible to prevent the member 725 from colliding with the member 725.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends so as to incline upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 arranged at a distance shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) is arranged.

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the long direction are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. It is formed as a long hole along the direction and has a straight line (a straight line that passes through the through hole 731a and faces the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) like the through hole 731a for passing the fastening screw and the bulging portion 716a. 731b, which is formed in a groove depth slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731 when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716. It can be slid along the straight line to be emitted, whereby the standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulation groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and rolls with a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c that hang down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and is a base with screws inserted into mounting holes 732 formed in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c. It is attached to the member 710.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c in the longitudinal direction, and sounds and vibrations generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and is in contact with two front and rear positions on the peripheral surface of the sphere P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the sphere P8 upward. It is configured to guide you.

FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the feeding status of the ball by the ball feeding device 720 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c), the cover member 721 is not shown for ease of understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a regulated state (a state in which the supply of electric power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). In the case of, the regulation overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passing opening 724, abuts on the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the suction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulation overhanging portion 745 Retreats to the upper part of the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is lifted, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts on the front side wall of the foundation member 711 to prevent further flow, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, so that the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not abut on the front side wall of the base member 711. Will be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back surface side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Flow is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. be.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A plate with a sharp tip formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower blade portion 725b thereof, and the same plate as the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b. Mainly includes an upper blade portion 725c extending from the above.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back surface side of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower side projects upward from the flow plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to a ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the thread Y8 is treated when the thread Y8 is fixed to and entered into the ball P8 will be described.

146 (a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit 112a in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a), and FIG. 147 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit 112a, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 after launching the ball P8. In addition, in FIGS. 146 and 147, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of a part of the constituent members of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 stays in contact with the left lower edge portion of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), A current is passed through the launching solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously overhangs to give a launching force to the sphere P8, and the sphere P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a). )reference).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the game area, the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8. It is known that the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening by loosening it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by using the firing force of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture toward the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the thread Y8 moves while being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the launch rail 730 through the lower side of the flow plate portion 724a, and the intermediate portion of the thread Y8 is the flow plate portion 724a. Since the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface, the thread Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c protruding above the flow plate portion 724a, and enters the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. ..

When the player holds the front end (the other end) of the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is loaded by applying a load due to the firing of the ball P8 to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subject to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the thread Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the thread Y8, but in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and is inside. It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much the load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the effect operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The composition of is almost the same.

The effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is arranged on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advance / retreat operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance / retreat operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance / retreat operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third. It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in (an operation including at least one of an operation of retracting the display area of the symbol display device 81 toward the outside), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other. The end of the drive side arm member 910 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100, and the drive force of the drive motor 921 is transmitted via the arm gear 924 to drive the drive side arm member 910 and the drive side arm member 910. The drive motor 921 that generates the drive force, the transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears that transmit the drive force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and the rotation operation of the drive side arm member 910 are interlocked with each other. On the left and right sides of the thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction, the thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and the drive side arm member 910. It mainly includes a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800.

Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It includes a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

The central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to the position on the right side of the upper end portion of the central main body of the support base material 801 and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is moved to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 801P is bored at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801 and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, there is a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which the detection arc plate 880d of the play fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long substantially oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region thereof from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion constituting the upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion constituting the region below the upper end region.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that extends slightly long in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable up and down as described later, the support base material 801 is arranged so as to be movable up and down. It is possible to reduce the operating space when the 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than being formed into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are interlocked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the positions of the openings 801P, respectively, as described later. It can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, it can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. Arranged to the right (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a posture of slightly tilting to the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the space between the support base material 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from being widened, via the drive side arm member 910. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In addition, in FIGS. 155 and 156, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. It is formed as a member of the above, and is provided with a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back surface side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer circumference (see FIG. 154). ).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petals 802, and the peripheral edges also have irregular irregularities in the front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are molded into substantially the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is such that the specific color (red) becomes darker without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S having a screw hole inside, extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at two locations, near the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. There is.

The petals 802 are from the rear side portion 802a rather than the rear side portion 802a arranged on the tip round shape side (front view counterclockwise side, right side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp tip shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The anterior portion 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the anterior side of the posterior portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the posterior portion 802a is superimposed on the posterior side of the anterior portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other, thus five. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear position, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped in the front-rear direction at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationship can be matched, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

The five petals 802 as a whole in the arranged state have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member fixed to each of the five petals 802 and separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and the outer peripheral edge portion thereof has a shape extending forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S extending rearwardly in a cylindrical shape and having a screw hole inside are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated from the member 803 (in the lateral direction).

The screw-in portion 803S is formed in an arrangement that is substantially located on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side wall of the flat plate member 803. The slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screwed portion 803S. As described above, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwed portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), on the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803, screw insertion holes are provided inside at two locations corresponding to the screwing portions 802S of the petals 802, respectively, and the petals 802 are provided on the front side. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screwed portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is abutted from the front to the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803, and the screw is screwed from the rear side, whereby the flat plate member 803 is attached to the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-shaped member having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

It will be described back to FIG. 156. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, with two adjacent locations out of five equidistant locations in the circumferential direction and one in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. The screwing portion 813S having a screw hole inside the extension is integrally formed, and the positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 813S is not formed among the above-mentioned five locations. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwed portions 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the central slit 814 has only an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

The side slits 815 are formed so as to extend in parallel on both sides of the center slit 814 with a slight gap.

As described above, a set consisting of three slits of the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides thereof are formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals) from each other. Each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost side slits 815 in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits are both side slits. It has a shape that is approximately rectangular in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Includes an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape that coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides are formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set consisting of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged and formed more closely so as to be close to each other inward, which also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 compact.

In other words, if the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. However, in the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 can be laid out more closely, and the slit member 810 can be laid out by that amount. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is small at both ends of the slide member 820 so that the tip portion has a semicircular shape in front view. The extension portion to be molded, the central portion where the thickness is larger than that of the effect portion at the position between the extension portions, the screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extension portion, and the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 that is projected from the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side. To prepare for.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is in a posture in which the extending direction and the elongated direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles with each other. And are arranged so as to span the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810 from the front side. When fully fitted, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, a screw with a washer (washer head screw) 824 is inserted into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and is screwed into the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so that it slides in.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In the description of FIGS. 160 and 161 with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

As described above, the rotary plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 the rotary plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall having a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side.

The guide rail 832 has a shape in which a peripheral wall extends forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 so that the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830 so as to be closed in a loop shape in a front view. It is integrally formed with the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge angle portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to fall off.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the front-view clockwise direction along a direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line of the pivot opening 831 and the normal line, and thereafter. It extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved in an arc shape toward the front clockwise direction side from this intermediate direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the side end of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof projects toward the front side of the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 from the front end portion.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are arranged at equal intervals in the pivot opening 831. It extends from the surroundings to the outside in a spiral shape.

On the rear side surface of the rotary plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on the outer periphery thereof is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 locally bulges at five points as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830. The pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotary plate 830 is smoothly and rotatably supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161A, a third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the second gear 830G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the second gear 830G. , Arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, there are three locations on the rear peripheral wall portion 815 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screwing portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is formed at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned with respect to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. Positioning is performed by inserting 813a (see FIG. 156) into the positioning hole 810c, and fixing is performed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off to prevent the rotating plate 830. Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the central axis rotation device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 is a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852 thereof. A flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand the diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, whereby a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction is formed. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two front screw holes 857 having internal screw holes on the left and right sides of the lumen 856, and the front screw hole 857 to the lumen 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend slightly forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. .. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the lumen portion 856, it extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing positions, extends further to the rear from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and inwardly. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, the rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed so as to project rearward at a position equidistant from both rear screwing portions 853 at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

On the LED board 861, a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and screwing the screw into the front screwing portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. , The LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, the LED substrate 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 having a size capable of fitting the screwing portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are one central location and a large number of locations that are arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles that spread multiple times (double) around this one location. Each of the LEDs 865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of places arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed toward the rear.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. The central decorative member 868 is made of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, extending in a columnar shape from a long plate-shaped base to the back side, and a screw can be screwed into the central part. A pair of screw-in portions 869 in which screw holes are formed are provided.

The screw-in portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. The screwing portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is abutted from the front side to the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 sandwiching the LED board 861, and the screw is screwed into the screwing portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. Thereby, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED substrate 861.

The free fitting device 880 is coaxial with a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner peripheral surface slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter. It mainly includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large-diameter cylindrical member 882, which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and a main body cylindrical member 883 that is rotatably fitted to each other.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has a screw-in portion 883S integrally extending in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and having a screw hole inside, in each of two places where one is skipped out of four places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the above-mentioned four locations where the screwing portion 883S is not formed.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in a rib shape in the outer diameter direction with the same protrusion length as the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at a position intermediate in the circumferential direction of the corresponding four locations, and is also axial. A sliding rib 883b extending over is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) and the decorative member 884 thereof are outside. With the back cover 886, which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, and the outer peripheral side of the fastened portion rises to the front side to form a cup shape with a bottom, and the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is abutted from the back side and fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

The front and back surfaces of the back cover 886 are entirely plated (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-shaped. Therefore, for example, the light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that produces light emission by being irradiated with light from LEDs 856 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, constitutes the shape of a hibiscus flower, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property and a back side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. An opening 885 is provided in the central portion so as to be large enough to allow the central decorative member 868 to be inserted.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this way is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The free fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161A, a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the third gear 810G. It is rotatably pivotally supported by the support base material 801 and meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the third gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and a screw insertion hole is formed around the pivot opening 880a at a position corresponding to two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a in the 880b.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be overlapped with the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. The 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and is slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a screw insertion hole 880b and a detection arc plate 880d extending to the back surface side in an arc shape centered on a rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recess 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and the member passing through the donut-shaped recess 801D is detectablely arranged. It is detected by the coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the posture in which the fourth gear 880G starts rotating, it is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the detection arc plate 880d (minimum angle). 72 ° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central axis rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, their respective rear ends slightly project rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and also from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear side screwing portion 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out to the rear through the lumen portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to project forward with respect to the support base material 801. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is externally fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged at eight points along the circumferential direction by the screwing portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b, so that the rear peripheral wall portion of the slit member 810 is formed. The slit member 810 is in linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the 813, so that the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is formed. It is supported smoothly and freely.

FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800, the drive side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advance and retreat operation) by being applied with a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and is a member in the lower left corner of the front view. A support column 1110 projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed so as to be accommodating from the front side above the support column 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the above, and the support elongated hole 1140 drilled as an elongated hole that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support pillar 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly prepared for.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910, and is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right near the outer periphery of the front end portion thereof so that screws can be screwed into the support column 1110. It includes a screw-in portion 1111 to be formed, and a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side in a pair of upper and lower parts on the same surface as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape in the rear view, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and a support column. A rotating shaft hole 911 that is rotatably supported by 1110, and a connecting convex portion 912 that is convexly provided in a columnar column on the front side at a position near one end of a long main body member. The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the main body member of the shaku to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support portion 914 and a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted in the transmission slot 913 and a flange portion 926 extending outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected while slightly intersecting with each other, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. The first accommodating portion 1121, the second accommodating portion 1122 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121, and the second accommodating portion 1122 are arranged in the opposite direction of the first accommodating portion 1121 and the drive side arm member. It mainly comprises a third accommodating portion 1123 in which the arm gear 924 fitted to the 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and supported so as to be slidable up and down. It is provided with an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line. Due to the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operating device 800 is kept constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° when viewed from the front, and is arranged from the vicinity of the outer circumference. It is provided with an extension wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed in a substantially linear shape in a rear view, and is provided in a columnar shape toward the back side at one end and has a back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by a support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 with the collar fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the support elongated hole 1140.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of supported elongated holes 931 (three locations in the present embodiment) so as to be slidable to the left and right on the side substrate 1000S, and is supported by a plurality of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side elongated hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction arranged on the left end side, and is arranged on the right end side. It is connected to the second effect member 940 by the tip side insertion hole 933 which is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base end side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the stop portion 932a formed at the upper end portion along a locus in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. It mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S has a cylindrical portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in the front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support pillar portion 1150, and has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is arranged at a position corresponding to the support pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. The support convex portion 1002S, which is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface in the positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and the right corner portion in the front view, is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. The convex portion 1005S, which is convexly provided on the front side along the arc shape having the same center as the above, is mainly provided.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip thereof of the supported convex portion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. It is arranged in the gap between the two, and is configured as a portion that supports the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable by screwing a screw for preventing the slide plate 930 from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S in that state.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the convex portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The ridge portion 1005S is formed at a convex height that does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the normal position, but can abut if the second effect member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position. Will be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion in which the lower end portion is formed in a bifurcated manner and the upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support column portion 941. Axial support column 941 that is convexly provided in a columnar shape and pivotally supported by sandwiching a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary convex that is arranged close to the shafted support column portion 941 and is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface. The unit 942 and the like are mainly provided.

The shafted strut portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having a slightly smaller outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). A screw-in portion 941a with a disc-shaped lid member 945 having a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S arranged at the tip of the shaft support support portion 941 while being inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar sandwiched between them. By screwing the screw into the lid member 945, the lid member 945 serves to prevent it from coming off. As a result, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the tip side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip to prevent the slide plate 930 from coming off. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 comes into contact with the arc recess 1004S and causes resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and the arm gear 924 in a predetermined angle range in the out-of-diameter direction. A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 overhanging, a shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports the collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates an urging force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800, and a support slot. A cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangle shape in front view so as to support the board cover 1000C in the lower right of 1140, and a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged in close proximity to the cover support portion 1164 and hidden by the board cover 1000C in front view. It mainly includes a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side substrate 1000S includes screwing portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screwing portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effecting member 940 at a slight distance from the second effecting member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 is missing, the screwed portion 1006S is used to make the second effect member 940. 2 The displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is laminated and fixed to the side base materials 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are laminated and fixed to each other in the front-rear direction, thereby fastening and fixing the substrate cover. The 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easier to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S even when the petal operating device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. 1100 is a front view, and FIGS. 169, 171 and 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 show a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 show the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is arranged at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the drive side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the moving range, the transmission slot 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is an inwardly fitted convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (FIG. 169). (Refer to 151), it extends in the tangential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (idle rotation range), so that the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 is reduced. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171 the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as interlocking. Can be made to.

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 so as to project toward the originally arranged position of the petal operation device 800, the second effect member 940 operates following the petal operation device 800. It can be visually recognized as if it were.

Next, the collection / dispersion rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central axis rotating device 850. It is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. Is a front view showing through the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. It is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operation device 800 descends due to the elevating operation and is in the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 expands from the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to the expansion shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. After passing through the middle position, the expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the rotation operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position, and then the gathering operation (third operation) is performed. It is configured so that it can return to the initial position (gathering position) by performing operation).

In the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is the inner end (circular opening 811 side end) of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810. As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are located at the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole is located. It is in a state of gathering that constitutes a flower.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (concentration position) as described above, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the counterclockwise direction as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c), this is observed. By interlocking the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)), the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831, it can be easily wrapped around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotary plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotary plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front as shown by the arrow A11 on the front surface thereof. Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 is linearly linear from the inner end to the outside along the central slit 814. Guided by to move.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding outward from the gathering position. In this expanding operation, as described above, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is tilted in the counterclockwise direction of the front view by an angle θ11 with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination. Will be faster.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount (angle) of the rotating plate 830. The 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small as compared with the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, assuming that the central slit 814 is tilted clockwise with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. The decline is even more pronounced.

Further, at this time, as described above, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends from the central end to the front clockwise side along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831. After that, the shape extends outward while curving in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, and extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. ..

As the guide rail 832 is tilted clockwise in this way, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower. Further, as the guide rail 832 curves in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, the decrease in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed become more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining the rail 832 clockwise and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of deviation. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 should be increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured in.

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823 to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure the certainty of power transmission, while the central slit 814 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823. , The structure is divided into roles.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially and becomes fully open, and the expansion operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 are moved so as to be radially dispersed, so that the position is continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in the front view. The petals 802 are arranged in. As a result, compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), it is integrally visually recognized as a flower of a hibiscus that is one size larger (FIG. FIG. 178 (b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move further outward, the slide pin 823 is subsequently locked to the outer end of the central slit 814. Therefore, the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate any more in the same direction as before with a small torque lower than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state can be maintained after the expansion operation is completed.

After the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts the rotation in the counterclockwise direction of the front view indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expansion operation, the petals 802 rotate in the front-view counterclockwise direction in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotational power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the rotation power is immediately applied to the rotary plate 830 so that the expansion operation and the rotation operation are continuous immediately. Can be migrated.

When the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (clockwise in the front view) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is rotated. While being dampened by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first, only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction of the rear view as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), whereby the expansion operation is performed. Is a gathering operation in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 to the inner end which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, five sets of petals 802 are transferred from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 in the center. It gathers toward it, returns to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, returns to the gathering state, and completes the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without stopping, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first gear 804G is further rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction of the rear view indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petals 802 are shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). It rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a gathered state.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view clockwise direction in the aggregated state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view counterclockwise) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

From this gathering operation to the rotational operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above, it is possible to temporarily stop and then shift after a while, or to shift immediately so as to be continuous without a pause. It can also be.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by passing the detection arc plate 880d through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so that the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotational operation.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 the passage forming unit 9140 has the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the lower end portion and the front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion below the S-shaped path SL2. .. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-shaped portion 152 is bent and formed toward the front side in such a manner that the notch 9145b is covered from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 abuts on the lower surface of the upper stop convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back surface side, and is upward generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, the possible fraudulent activities will be described.

It will be described back to FIG. 148. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the firing force of the ball. If the firing force is weak, the thread Y8 is cut. The ball was sometimes fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower plate 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly launched, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146 to the other end of the thread Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back surface side (launch solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725, so that even if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the thread Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The pre-launched ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits a fraudulent act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, whereby the ball P9 can be won. It is possible to repeatedly pass through 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and it is possible to obtain an illegal profit.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is used for fraudulent activity as described above, a thin plate blade is passed through the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when the cheating person pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, so that the thread Y8 is damaged and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed toward the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is brought when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can abut on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145 to increase the resistance to an upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the payout ball can easily damage the thread Y8. That is, since a person who commits fraud is afraid of discovering the fraud, after grasping the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, a pocket of trousers, etc.). ), It is easy to perform fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched at a position about the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

When the prize ball is paid out in this state, the ball discharged from the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side to the lower plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, and the ball guide opening. While stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the 53 and hitting the thread Y8, the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right, and the bottom opening arranged behind the ball pulling lever 52. Flow down through. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the thread Y8, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that inclines downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it possible to easily give a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 via the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.

As a result, the ball can be directed toward the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 diminishes. That is, since the right-sloping surface 9142a can forcibly give the lower plate 50 a velocity component toward the right (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side) to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction, among the balls to be discharged, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side occupies a region of about two-thirds of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53. The lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the boarding restriction step portion is formed at the boundary. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a has a right end portion (right end side) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction while connecting to the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed on the upper side of the boarding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms a front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul ball passage portion. 9145 is communicated with. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side before passing through the ball guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the thread Y8.

The width of the riding control step portion 9053a in the vertical direction is set to be equivalent to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the boarding control step 9053a allows the ball to pass in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment has been described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 184 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above right, FIG. 185 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 on the left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion on the upper side of the S-shaped path SL2. Then, the sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side in a manner of covering the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180). The radius. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d at which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is provided. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back surface side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to be convex from the side surface on the back surface side to the back surface side. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is a sphere. The radius is about Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, and the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 collide with the ball P8 to crack or chip. This can be prevented and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed from an inclined shape extending toward the back surface side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (to the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 becomes wider as it is closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily inserted into the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. It is a portion constituting the forked blade portion of 10153 and extends to the left in a manner of slightly ascending and tilting from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. As a result, an acute-angled recess 10155 having an acute recessed deep portion is formed between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portions 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the notch 10145c on the back side edge. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the thread Y8 can enter the acute angle concave portion 10155, and the thread Y8 can be easily damaged.

The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the thread Y8 is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who commits fraudulent activity. Can easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portions connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are configured to abut on the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged so as to face the left and right sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the opposite direction. To. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

For example, a cheating person tries to avoid the discovery of cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, the thread Y8 or the ball P8 is loaded in the opposite directions at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stops.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are kept inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the game area is lengthened, so that the detection of fraudulent activity can be accelerated.

An adhesive member (glue, birdlime, etc.) may be arranged in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 so as to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheating person is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member arranged in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since it is not discharged from the yarn and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) whose firing intensity is weak and does not reach the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described, but the plate passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment has the foul ball. It is equipped with a foul ball receiving entrance 2164 to receive. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged from the resin material so as to be arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game region side. A guide member formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 having a width at which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a formed and placed close to the ball launch unit 112a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b and.

Downstream of the gap V11, a foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with the foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side is formed. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through the furnishing, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above the width.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 The formation is omitted. That is, the balls discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, the full tank switch (not shown) arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the payout device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the payout device is turned on. The payout of balls from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering a fraudulent act as described above, in which balls are adhered to both ends of the thread Y8 and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c so that the thread Y8 is inserted into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, by hitting the payout ball against the thread Y8, the action of damaging the thread Y8 can be generated regardless of how the balls of the upper plate 17 are accumulated. This makes it easier to cut the thread Y8 at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In addition, in FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 arranged in the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the return ball prevention member 68, the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 in a posture arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back surface side of the return ball prevention member 68. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed, which is cylindrically projected from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b and has a screw-in groove for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A blocking plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is surface-contacted with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4 in advance to the base member 68b1. The long screw B11 is inserted into the through hole drilled as the mounting hole and the through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position with the through hole, and in that state, the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2. By being inserted, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side that abuts on the guide member 2062b match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that inclines downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is lower than the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment). , About 1/3 below the diameter of the sphere) intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. You can avoid that. On the other hand, when a ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 having a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and a width (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment) that the thread can enter with the closing plate 2062b4. It is recessed to the back side to the right position. The place where the notch 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is provided with a notch 2062b3 for a semicircle on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is exposed at the front-rear position where the notch 2062b1 is formed. The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of a fraudulent act performed through the thread Y8 in which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notch 2062b1 when receiving a load of pulling both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In that state, since the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing with the long screw B11 occurs, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically lower part of the center of the ball), so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the launched ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Further, a person who commits a fraudulent act performed through a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the thread Y8 protruding toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side of the ball P9 toward the front side (see FIG. 182), the thread Y8 moves toward the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 near the player side. Therefore, by arranging the notch 2062c closer to the front surface, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the notch 2062c as compared with the case where the notch 2062c is arranged closer to the back surface side.

In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion overhanging downward is arranged. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates under the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is arranged so as to be switchable between ON and OFF when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partially front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the weight portion 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68, and FIG. 190 (b) shows. The state in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is shown. Further, in FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference, and it is shown that the button type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch is shown. It is shown that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball prevention member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed due to the opening / closing portion 68a1 tilting as shown in FIG. 190 (b), the figure immediately shows that the ball flows away. Since the state shown in 190 (a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) is restored by the timing when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (at the shortest, after 0.6 seconds). Because it can be done.

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to an object that does not flow away such as a sphere, for example, an object that travels while filling a passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example,). Bend a nail (not shown) to be planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (such as cutting a nail) is possible.

FIG. 191 is a partially front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that illegally invades is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is to be advanced while being excluded. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is dismissed by the tip portion of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the tip portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a2 is maintained in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent fraud as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, it is controlled to sound an alarm when the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , It is possible to detect cheating at an early stage.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) may be controlled to stop. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped as much as possible (see FIG. 190 (a)), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in the present embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side arranged on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it is early. Can be exchanged for. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent activity even before the replacement, and saves the trouble of forgetting the storage location, as compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option. It can play the effect. Further, it is not necessary to include the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be disposed).

Further, whether or not the return ball prevention member 68 is effective in preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent activity when the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. It is possible to maintain the deterrence of fraudulent activity by not knowing whether or not the exchange has been carried out, and even if it has been exchanged, the degree of damage is unknown to the person who commits the fraudulent activity. can.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. Consists of aspects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device 2880 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a flange portion 2887 thereof in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment. The flange portion 2887 is provided with a regulating portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip to the back surface side. The play-fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment has only a difference in the back cover 2886 as compared with the play-fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment, and is provided with the same loose-fitting device 880 in other parts. ..

The regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802. That is, the regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, the case where the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 are arranged in a single unit will be described, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. .. In addition, in FIGS. 193 and 194, operation examples of the petal operation device 2800 are shown in chronological order, and the simultaneous points are shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), 193 (b) and 194 (b), respectively. The state of is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the regulating portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are screwed portions on the side facing each other with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. It is provided with an inclined surface 2803T that is inclined so as to move away from the 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed so as to be inclined by about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the regulating unit 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is arranged outside the diameter of the front side portion 802 b of the petal 802 along the moving direction (the petal 802 is slid. The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is further loaded by the regulating portion 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. To change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 has a normal posture (a posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are oriented in the longitudinal direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) shown in FIG. 194 (a). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the central slit 814 and the side slits 815. Posture changes occur in the petals 802 to the extent possible.

As the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 changes in this way, the load from the regulating portion 2888 is received, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the slide member 2820 has the narrow slide rib 803a only in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed and the slide member 2820 has the slits 814 and 815. It is possible to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 abuts the slide rib 803a on the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T on the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. (Pressed) increases frictional resistance. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance becomes remarkable. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the lateral direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. ..

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 to the movement in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815. The torque applied to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) from the slide pin 823 can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) without waiting (slide member 2820 in a normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in an inclined posture).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b), the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 separates from the regulating portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 by the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 195, the state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193 (b) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so that the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. In FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b), and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the expanding position to the gathering position is shown in chronological order.

In FIG. 196 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, the regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b as shown in FIG. 196 (b), and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 become the normal postures. Will be returned.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830, and therefore the petals. The rotational movement of the 802 is settled, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petal 802 can be rotated at the position during expansion and then returned to the gathering position automatically.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts on the regulating portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view). If), the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided. Therefore, it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petals 802 to the fully open position and rotate the petals 802 at the fully open position.

Further, the arrangement of the regulating portion 2888 is such that the petal 802 slightly changes its posture even if it comes into contact with the petal 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position or at the petal 802 rotating at the fully open position. By setting the position so that the regulating portion 2888 can pass through and the load can be evacuated, it is possible to prevent the regulating portion 2888 from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the regulation unit 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in front view, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it serves as a mark as to whether or not the petal 802 passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern. The difference in perspective can make a difference between the petal 802 expanding to the maximum and performing a rotational operation, and the petal 802 expanding halfway to perform a rotational operation.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802 can be improved. The pattern of the mold can be made to function as a directing part. As a result, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the regulating portion 2888 from the aspect of design, the degree of freedom in designing the regulating portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 may come into contact with the regulating portion 2888 and slightly change its posture, which may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning to be conveyed to the player depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (with a flutter) while contacting the regulating portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture. ..

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts with the regulation portion 2888 is the tip position, but if the abuting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the petal 802 changes its posture. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even if the regulating portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be changed by a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 has been described, but the petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment has been described. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIGS. 198 and 199, operation examples of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) are illustrated in chronological order. Further, in FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since it is the same as the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate with each other in excess of the resistance to be generated, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 is the guide rail 832. With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the width of the central slit 814 is widened in the wall portion on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814. Of the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a to be provided and the both side slits 815 arranged on the front view clockwise side of the central slit 814, the side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the front view clockwise side. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a recessed in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction of the center slit 814, and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814. Inside, a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b, which is recessed in a wall portion on the front clockwise side in a manner of widening the width of the slits 815 on both sides in the lateral direction, is mainly provided.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from a position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side (lower side of FIG. 198 (a)) of the slit member 3810. Is formed in.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is located on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198 (a)) from the position where the flat plate member 2803 is arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. Is formed continuously to.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise in the front view will be described. First, when the rotary plate 830 starts rotating clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are moved in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (the slide rib 803a at the right end is a clock). It moves in the direction of entering the peripheral side recessed portion 3815a (see FIG. 198 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the front view of the slits 815 on both sides and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (slide member 2820, flat plate member 2803 and slit member). It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199 (a) and 199 (b)) with the portion that first abuts with the 3810 as a fulcrum.

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessing depth than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the guide pin 822 during rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above. And the contact between the central recessed portion 3814a and the screwed portion 2803S and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b are avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a recessed depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut on the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-mentioned rotation. The peripheral side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. .. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal to each other, a front view is obtained. The slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the slits 815 on both sides on the clockwise side abuts on the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise side concave portion 3815a moves to the front counterclockwise side from the concave base end of the clockwise side concave portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in a state of moving in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)). The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center side in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform an operation that was not feasible in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 194 (b). ), The rotation operation of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (rotates around the slit member 3810). Rotational motion) intervenes (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 198 (FIG. 198). a)), By rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b)). That is, the rotation operation (rotational operation of rotating around the slit member 3810) of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in front view, a flat plate member 2803 and a flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) can be obtained. From the position of the petals 802 to be fastened and fixed, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position. As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then the gathering position (see FIG. 195). Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operating device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described, but in the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment, the curved surface of the lower frame member 8320 is curved. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. It should be noted that the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 (a), the first state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 201, and the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 202 (b). The state in the process of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the difference between the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment and the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been explained yet. Yes, other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is arranged so as to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. In the left and right sides of the first through hole 8326a and the vibrating device 5400, the top surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined in a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b, which are formed along the line and connect the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b which are formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a front view. Mainly provided with a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c have the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as drinking water described above downward and the purpose of facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. It is a through hole having and. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is obstructed to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless to the interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be smoothed, but the possibility that foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 is high.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 is in the front-rear direction, the easier it is for the tilting device 310 to be displaced (deformed) to the left or right near the front end. It should be noted that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding up design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Transformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is designed so as not to be a gap V13 enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right (for example, to the left), the gap V13 formed in the other (for example, to the right) is provided on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 has a size that is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the two and the coin, and can be a size that allows a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). If not, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also formed in the tilting device 310 by utilizing the play near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by giving a load toward the back side to shift (deform) the position, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In the present embodiment, when a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the left or right gap V13 or the front-back gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, and the tilting device 310 tilts, a coin is coined. Foreign matter in the shape may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202A and 202B, when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted inward toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. While it is possible to create a good feeling of operation, the part where the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202 (a)) protrudes outward from the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, which makes it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the translucency of the protective lens member 311i deteriorates, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be executed by the operation device 8300, so the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable to remove it as soon as it is discovered that the coin-shaped foreign matter has been removed, but in a state where the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shapes and arrangements of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

203 (a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operating device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (c) is a side view of the operating device 8300. It is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 in the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (e) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 203 (a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibrating device 5400, and is formed with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibrating device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58). To. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the center position on the left and right of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the upper surface of the extending portion 311h is tilted (left and right in the vertical view of the second state). An inclination D81 that inclines downward toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to being curved toward the tilting device 310, and an inclining D82 that inclines downward toward the front side due to the inclination of the tilting device 310. (See FIG. 201), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, it is possible to easily secure the strength of the lower frame member 8320 as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly widened to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object in a portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. It is considered to be larger than the size of the object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a left-right width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that allows light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25) to be transmitted. In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens members 313 which are connected to the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished (mirror-finished members) in the present embodiment. Is fixed) to reflect the light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

Due to this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state by using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign matter (coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light or the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame is not noticed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the member 8320 will continue to remain. It should be noted that this effect is not limited to the case of visual recognition through the first through hole 8326a, but is the same when the visual recognition is made through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is configured as a through hole capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left-right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that allows the largest possible coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin) to be discharged. The width in the normal direction is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-shaped foreign matter has slid downward along the curved shape of the leading edge of the bottom plate portion 321. You can remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used to discharge forward.

The third through hole 8326c has a central axis arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and a coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in the standing state (posture) as it is.

That is, the length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction needs to be formed in a size capable of ejecting coin-shaped foreign matter in a directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction is about 30 [mm] in the directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

To remove the coin-shaped foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the curved portion 371 of the main body is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since the installation portion 15a is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which it is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 which is opened to the right outward in the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)). Including each of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, it can be easily operated by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to promptly replace the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught with the normal operating device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the pachinko machine 10 does not operate normally and the pachinko machine 10 stops operating, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted immediately.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the board surface support device 600 is not subjected to the load from the front frame 14 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, but the board surface support device 600 in the 14th embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged so as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be in contact with the front frame 14. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the 14th embodiment of the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. Note that FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12 (the front frame 14 is not shown), and FIG. 204 (b) shows the front frame 14 as the inner frame 12. The closed state is shown. Further, in FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment is provided with a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (plate portion arranged on the back side) fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 of the main body plate portion 611 can be vertically displaced. The front-rear displacement member 2652, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and is displaceably supported in the front-rear direction, the locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the front-rear displacement. The support portion 2654, which is a portion that displaceably sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below at two front and rear positions and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653, and is on the front side of the front-rear displacement member 2652. It is provided with an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies an urging force toward the surface.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of being in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of being separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 has a slight gap between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)) and by being pushed backward by the front frame 14. It is configured to be displaceable at the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that inclines downward toward the tip side is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the front position to the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the rear position. , It is a continuously connected inclined surface.

The tilt angle and formation range of the inclined surface 2652a are such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the lower position in the front position of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the upper position in the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652. Set.

According to the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is large by the thickness in the front-rear direction thereof. be able to.

As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 by the rear claw member 640 from the back surface side can be increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the rotation front claw member 620. This makes it possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force of the worker, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of selection of the worker and the workability.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 against the illegality of melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire and infiltrating the inside as it is, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. The case where it is detected that the piano wire is burnt out and the fraud is detected at an early stage has been described. However, in the fraud detection device 2280 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire, the fraud detection device 2280 is described. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is restored to a tensile shape (stored shape) by applying heat. Will be done. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape in which the back side and the lower surface side are opened, and the main body box portion 2281 stacked above the inverted cup portion 2178 and the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281 are covered with a lid. The back cover member 2582 attached from the main body box portion 2281 and the back cover member 2582 are provided with a space.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, and has an extension portion 2283 that abuts on the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and the opening is narrowed upward from the lower corner portion. The narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, the protruding portion 2285 projecting upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284, and the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 are recessed from the back side. The first conduction portion 2286, which is housed in a concave portion, one end of which projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the right wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess recessed from the back side, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and hits the upper surface of the first conduction portion 2286. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can be contacted, a torsion spring SP15 that generates a urging force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and a protrusion on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284. It is provided with a shape memory spring 2288 that is supported by the portion 2285 and is arranged below the second conduction portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion 2287, one end of separate wiring is connected to a portion overhanging the outside of the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main control device. It is connected to 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 205 (b)). c) By doing so, the continuity is cut off, and the error signal is output with the fact that the continuity is cut off as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, and so on. It is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extending portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains as it is on the long cover 173. It can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and has a property of maintaining a deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a pre-memorized shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. .. In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature (about 80 °) of about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. ..

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion are pushed up. The continuity with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

The extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2482 in a vertically long shape in the front-rear direction, and is inserted into the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in a tension state and then returns to a low temperature state, the operator pushes down the extension portion 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce it (see FIG. 205 (b)). ) Can be returned again. That is, even after the fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the curved shape of the light guide member 540 causes a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted on both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment has a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 which schematically represents the part 2543b, and FIG. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, which schematically represents a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, in which FIG. 206 (e) schematically represents the upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. In FIG. 206 (a), the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed from a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically side by side according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portions 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

That is, the region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, the region CCVIc arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and the lower and inner lens member 530 with respect to the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 can be changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), the region CCVIb is formed with an upward concave portion 2543b which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape in which a sphere is divided into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the back surface side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is this. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), the region CCVIc is formed with a downward concave portion 2543c which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), the region CCVId is formed with a downward concave portion 2543d which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), the region CCVIe is formed with an upward concave portion 2543e which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region of the inner lens member 530 facing the curved bottom have the same shape as that of the eighth embodiment (inclination angle 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and the diameter of the bottom circle). It is formed from a 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down, and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), according to the above-described configuration, the light is advanced toward the inner lens member 530 side in the direction of collecting light, and the light is advanced toward the outer lens member 550 side in the direction of spreading light. Can be made to. That is, since the light guide member 2540 can be formed in the shape of a flat plate and have a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, the left and right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed to produce a light emitting effect. The effect can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs down is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the push-in end is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of "the button that cannot be pushed" can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of the operation (the end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to make the player notice that the tilting device 310 is in the "non-pushable button" state only after the pushing operation. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, since the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotary claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the ascending end can be sequentially switched) depending on the driving mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, and the effect can be produced in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched.

In the third embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (while the tilting device 310 is in the descending operation), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotary operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately after reaching the end point and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, while pushing back when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the accommodating member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the accommodating member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside the accommodating member 5430. When fixing the accommodating member 5430 to the tilting device 310, for example, when the convex leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321 and the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower push-in end, the convex leg portion If the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut on the accommodating member 5430 is switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the accommodating member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, the flexible member 5420 is operated at a predetermined speed or higher. It is possible to increase the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412 to form a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts on the accommodating member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, a display such as "press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press the button. Push it in at high speed and feel vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player, the button (tilting device 310) can be pressed with the specified pressing method. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button and prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and it is possible to prevent a failure that occurs when the tilting device 310 is pushed by force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut on the accommodating member 5430 while the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, while the weight member 310 is pushed to the end of movement. The 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the housing member 5430 may not be in contact with the accommodation member 5430. In this case, the vibration can be transmitted to the player in a state where the tilting device 310 is not operated to make the effect lively, while the player can change the effect (expected) by stopping the vibration when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Since it is possible to recognize (difference in degree), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. can.

As a variation of the effect, the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 are arranged so as not to be in contact with each other when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 continue. It is desired to generate both a case where the arrangement is possible to abut the same, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412 can cause two different cases.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft and the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 come into contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be in contact with the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to be in contact with the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunction cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board surface support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end portion thereof is the back side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and the game board is fixed in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there. 13 can be mounted on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable that a long path is formed in the front-rear direction directly behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. Further, by making the path bend back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, so that the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 are prevented from interfering with each other. Can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a path that bends up and down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connecting line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connection wire 453 is pulled out to the outside of the speaker assembly 450 due to the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from being disconnected from the speaker 451 even when the load is applied.

Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the back side wall portion 461H within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464, while the auxiliary protrusion portion 461H abuts more than that. In the range of length, there may be a configuration in which a step is provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, a range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T, the base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the tip side main body portion 461T are jointly used. You may configure a large speaker room with.

Further, although the volume of the base end side main body portion 461B is larger than that of the tip end side main body portion 461T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the volume may be the same. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left-right direction, or may be a position between the left-right end and the center in the left-right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (base end side main body portion 461B and tip end side main body portion 461T). The connection direction, the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491) have been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portions 467d and rib portions 467c) may be configured to overlap each other in a left-right direction view. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491. By making it difficult to perform cheating by invading the tip of the game into the game area and prolonging the time required for the cheating, it is possible to suppress the cheating. Here, examples of the suppression of fraudulent activities include suppression of fraudulent activities themselves and suppression of obtaining profits from fraudulent activities (successful fraudulent activities).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotary plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotary plate 830 and the play fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the play fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expansion operation and the gathering operation. Can be made to. As a result, the sliding operation of the petals 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The free fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or it may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 which slides and moves by the operation of the drive side arm member 910 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip end portion of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 will be described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). Since the right side of the board 13 is tilted toward the front side), the part of the game board 13 which is arranged to face the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere with each other. be able to. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 Whether or not the 600 is in the fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it can be restricted that the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not abut on the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, since the possibility that the multifunctional cover member 171 is damaged due to the collision of the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of the synthetic resin with the metal board surface support device 600 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced. Can be used for a long period of time in other uses (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light radiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a state in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The right panel unit 500 is configured to rotate around a parallel axis), so that the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, by switching the mode of the light radiated to the center frame 86 and the moving accessory that overhangs the inside of the center frame 86, the effect can be diversified.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost openings 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side on one side and on the other side. Consider switching between the case where it is placed on the front side and the case where it is placed on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged facing the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member emits light. When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (a wider range as compared with the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the moving accessory can be switched.

In this case, for example, the effect of the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory side. At the timing of facing the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) and change in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, switching that changes the light emitting portion according to the operation of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need for switching the LED 512a that controls light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness becomes higher, the amount of light becomes larger, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. It is diffused (low brightness, low light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting target (liquid crystal display or moving accessory).

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed toward the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display). By changing the posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), a beam-like (narrow state) light is emitted to the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or the liquid crystal display. As a result, it is possible to emit light in a wide range of positions away from the moving accessory and the liquid crystal while emitting light only in the details of the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken part is fragile enough to fall, and the detection sensor is placed at the position where the broken part passes when it falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the ball launch is controlled to be forcibly stopped, thereby aiming for early detection of fraudulent activity and due to fraudulent activity. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss incurred by the gaming machine hall) obtained by the cheating person.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to be made of resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in an inclined posture with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides arranged opposite to the inclined surface 2803T. The recessed portion may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance by causing the inclined surface 2803T to enter the recessed portion.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the traveling direction of the light is set to the direction of collecting the light or the direction of spreading the light by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is a direction in which the light is inclined upward in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select the aircraft to be played. It is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward. This makes it possible to improve the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

Further, for example, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe which are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530, and an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in the direction of tilting upward, so that the aircraft to be played is selected. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking in the direction of the player, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, the ball stored in the upper plate 17 can be illuminated with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Point where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means for a player to push in, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operating means overhangs the player from the first state. It is possible to configure two states, and it is provided with an urging means that urges the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is oriented toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

Also, from the player's playing posture, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the front, so the force applied by the player to the operating means should be naturally weakened. Can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, and can be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as the fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so it is possible to provide a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

As a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side surface of the left little finger is placed near the shaft rod, and the palm is placed near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and the thumb side is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is placed facing the operating means. Will be done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device includes a driving means for automatically operating the operating means and generating a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction facing the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled from the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button and receiving a high load on the driving means.

In the gaming machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means operated by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is said to be via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation causes the movement. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By making it a means, it is possible to change the movement width in which the operating device moves by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A6 gaming machine configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement is limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the second state is provided with a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and irradiating light toward the player, as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means unless the aim is aimed at. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. A featured gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is composed of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Points where the repulsive force during normal times is small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing a player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state. A game in which a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from a second state to a first state is provided, and an urging means for generating an urging force for moving from a first state to a second state is provided. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1 By pushing back the operating means with the two driving means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive it.

According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting discrimination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the gaming machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determining means is provided with a position difference detecting means for detecting and a moving direction determining means for determining the moving direction of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detecting means and the detection value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the moving direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a manner synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in the direction facing the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is characterized by being composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operating means is provided, and the second driving means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a support means is provided, and the closer the operating means is to the terminal position, the greater the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means that supports the driving motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (direction close to the operating means), so that the driving force that pushes back the operating means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration effecting device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means thereof. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the player emphasizes the ability to operate lightly, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. It is possible to reduce the speed and the possibility that the operating means will be damaged, but there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. The voice coil motor is controlled to be pushed out to an extended position, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operating means is arranged at a position where the voice coil motor can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Game machine C2 to play.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means are arranged at a position where they can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operating means while suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means, which is the end portion on the opposite side to the operating means, is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed, so that the operating means can be operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Prevents damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means is provided with the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for the purpose of production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is being driven in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in the operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. , There is a possibility that a large load will be generated on the drive means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the production is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The crossing direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Each of the convex portions is provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means exerts a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not disappear completely at a distance, but the resistance is periodically restored. As a result, when the player releases his hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, if the player holds the button when the button is driven "as an effect", one phase of the operation of the button will pass. Then, if the player releases his hand in the middle of the process, if he / she moves from the end of the first phase, the period in which the button is stopped becomes longer, and the feeling that "the player has started to move because the load is released" is reduced. It comes off.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane and the transmitting means of the releasing means are transmitted. It is possible to prevent the movement of the means from being stopped in the direction of proximity and separation. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operating modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operating means is the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the lapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the driving means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, since the driving means is usually hidden from the player and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can be watched over by the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means. The operating means is configured to operate between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and is a first means for suppressing the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a variable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means. A release load means for giving a load for disengaging the engagement of one means to the operation means to the first means is provided, disengagement by the release load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the movement. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the end position of the operation means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the position of the releasing load means is performed based on the operation of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the releasing load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmitting means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. An example is a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized in other phases.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load given from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operably arranged by the operation of the release load means. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it can be switched whether or not it operates synchronously.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the releasing load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmitting means by the load from the first means, and the releasing load means is operated by the operation of the releasing load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but since the rotation cycles are different, the second rotating means is predetermined. It is possible to prepare a plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operation means is moved toward the second position. , The range of production can be expanded. For example, it is possible to realize an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means configured to be movable between and having a vibrating vibrating portion and a receiving means arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut on the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can abut on the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibration means that transmits vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. .. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases the vibration, and there is a problem that the vibration may not be noticed by the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration for the first time by operating the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the mode of the player's operation. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contacting state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation strength of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means during vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in a direction close to the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means is characterized in that the deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means is lower than the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. ..

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the supporting means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a portion of the gaming machine F3 with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving means is loaded. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the drive means.

Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, in the frame part of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means can be used. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, when the driving force generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means and the transmitting means. There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the rotation shaft. The gaming machine G2, which is characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means and a role as a portion for generating a bearing force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is convexly provided in parallel with the axis of rotation, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected to each other, and elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotating shaft in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member tends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Can increase the operating resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 comprising a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to an axis in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration so that the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent ball goat with thread. Pachinko machine H>
In a gaming machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the gaming balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launcher and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the gaming ball is weak, the gaming ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. Therefore, for example, an illegal tool with a game ball connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired at a low firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of being able to gain fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball is performed by using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-shaped member) by the loading means.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the loading means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the gaming machine H3 or H4 is provided with a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the loading means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a receiving dish, which is a dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving dish is a portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharging side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball discharged from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, thereby passing through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball ejection portion, which is a portion for discharging the game ball to be dispensed from the payout device, is to the receiving dish, which is the dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other gaming ball was performed using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the payout ball can make it easier to damage the thread.

<Structure of board retainer. Pachinko machine I>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from one side.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the fixing means is configured so that the fixing means can be changed only after the gaming board is pushed into the position in the used state. Therefore, when the gaming board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, so that the gaming board is pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the gaming board and applies a pushing force, so that the gaming board can be pushed to the position in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is characterized in that the gaming means is displaced to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the gaming means unusable. ..

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means becomes unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removal work of the gaming means can be improved and it is a game. Since it is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means is a gaming machine I4 including a contacting means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the gaming means, the state changing means changes to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the gaming means against the state changing means, the state changing means can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is configured to be accepted by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means can be used to efficiently apply a load to the contacting means via the gaming means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the closing means for closing the opening on one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means cannot be used by the state changing means so that the gaming means cannot be used. The gaming machine I6 is provided with a closing restricting unit that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the gaming means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Pachinko machine J>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotation axis side of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, an arrangement means is arranged in a path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different between the first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the first place and the second means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the second place. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by a method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply placed. Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed from the cup shape, so that it is possible to prevent further intrusion of the invading member.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting the electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the gaming means. Characterized gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry restricting portion is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. It is possible to easily generate the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means is provided with a eliminating means for guiding a member that has entered from the outside to a eliminating area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the gaming means by the arranging means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member that has entered from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a decorative board with a five-sheet structure. Involved in fraud prevention. Pachinko machine K>
The first and second means are arranged so as to face each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and the first means and the second means are arranged along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting with the first direction. The gaming machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the machine. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means in the gaming machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by the fitting generated by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. As a result, even when a fraudulent act of destroying the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of fastening and fixing thereof is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means fixed to the member of the above-mentioned member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guide means.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with a contacting means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contacting means. Can be done. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means illegally attempts to disassemble. can do.

<Point L for utilizing the curved light guide means. As a point, it has not been reached>
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means arranged facing the light guide means and projecting the light passing through the light guide means are provided. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion facing the convex portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant. The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed depending on the unit.

In the gaming machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected in the concave facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means with the light-guiding means and is projected with light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projecting means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion facing the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion facing the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission property.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transparency is formed from substantially the same material, by incident the same light on the light guide means, the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the projected means and the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the counterprojection means. Can be different.

<Bass reflex speaker layout structure. Pachinko machine M>
The first means and the second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other and form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means arranged so that at least a part thereof enters the internal space, and the above-mentioned. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine and sent to the outside of the gaming machine, so that it is easy to produce a bass sound. There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. It is possible to cancel the regulation of the left-right width and allow the vibration wave to travel at any distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the pachinko machine M2, wherein the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. By abutting against each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a directing means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the effect means for supporting the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the directing means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without squeezing the space used for the directing. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop on the way. Pachinko machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction. In a gaming machine provided with a second displacement means that can be switched between a non-following state that displaces in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, at least when the second displacement means is in the following state. The gaming machine N1 is provided with a third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end portion. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means is set. , It can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Gaming machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is characterized in that the state of the second displacement means can be changed by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the gaming machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a function as a production device.

The gaming machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. The gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly, so that the displacement resistance should be prevented from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As a point, it has not been reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). Kai 2012-048970 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted in the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Pachinko machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the supporting portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having a low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are composed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are formed by a shape based on the shape of the solid object having different directions, so that the second opening is formed. It is possible to easily remove a solid object through the portion.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. ..

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E4 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E4 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 A gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E4 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13 Game board (game means)
14 Front frame (blocking means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of receiving plate)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
145,9145,10145 Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
159 Open / close regulation part (blockage regulation part)
173 Long cover member (part of elimination means)
178 Reverse cup part (part of placement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of elimination means)
180 Bundling movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operation device 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous striking discrimination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft part (Shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (urging means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Main body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343d Coil spring (urging means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disk cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (convex part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection line (passing member)
460 front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming ribs (bending means, projecting portion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing convex part (part of the opening)
487 Passage forming ribs (bending means, projecting portion)
500 Right panel unit (directing means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (means to be connected)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 513c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib part (contact means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Convex part (part of connecting part)
600 Board surface support device (state change means)
620 Rotating front claw member (proximity means)
640 Rotating rear claw member (contact means)
801 Support base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (driving means)
830 rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disk cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance)
5412 Weight member (vibrating part, part of repulsive means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means and repulsion means)
5430 Accommodating member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 disk member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disk member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodating means)
8326a 1st through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
8326b 2nd through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
8326c 3rd through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
9142a Right slope (part of payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10145d Rolling plate (regulatory means)
E1 notification device (detection means)
P1a deformed part (deformed part)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped route (bent part)
V13, V14 gap

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means for changing the state between a fixed state in which the gaming board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the gaming board is removable from the inner frame (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-230420

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of work efficiency related to the fixing means. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having good work efficiency related to fixing means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an opening between the gaming means used during the game and one side facing the gaming means, and can accept the gaming means from that one side. The receiving means is provided with a state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state in which the gaming means cannot be used to a usable state in which the gaming means can be used. The state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the game means from one side when the game means is put into the use state.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, work efficiency can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). 6 is a front perspective view of the operating device in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operating device in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in the XIVc line. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the drive device, and (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. (A) and (b) are front views of the release member and the rotary claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of an operating device in the XXX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 59 (a). It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction view of the arrow LIXc. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vibrating apparatus in line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. 65 (a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG. 66 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. Is. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member, the ring member, and the second transmission member of the left disk cam. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXXVa-LXXVa of FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f). Is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which opened (deployed) the inner frame with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame with the inner frame opened with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are shown side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically showing a binding movable member and a harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a binding movable member and a harness. It is a schematic diagram of the back surface schematically shown, and (d) is a schematic view of the upper surface of FIG. 96 (c). (A) and (b) are the top schematic views of the front frame, the inner frame, the binding movable member and the harness which schematically show the binding movable member and the harness. It is a front view of the passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of the support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly in the CXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly of FIG. 124 (a). It is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction view, and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction view of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of the above. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line of FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device and the game board schematically showing the board surface support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (A) to (c) are the front view of the ball launching unit which shows the feeding state of the ball by the ball feeding device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting showing the relationship between the thread and the metal member for cutting in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of a ball launching unit, an inner rail and an outer rail after launching a ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation apparatus in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of the slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate, the side base material, and the second effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of the inner frame and the dish passage forming member in eleventh embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (A) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlargement view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the slit member and the slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 203 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). Yes, (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing the upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and is located in a region composed of a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can easily enter. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by arranging the fingertip on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a) is shown. Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the vertical direction, and FIG. 7 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state facing upward and rearward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is shown. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press a button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a method of dropping the hand vigorously downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front side depending on the degree of tilting. The palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping his / her hand downward vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to operate by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to forcefully drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, the difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view will be described. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. 7. In FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's point of view in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i is gradually increased in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, and the LED device 341f (FIG. 3) is arranged inside the operation device 300 accordingly. Since the amount of light in (see 12) is gradually increased, the difference in the amount of light (degree of lightness and darkness) that the player can see between the first state and the second state becomes large, and the first state and the second state are displayed. The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to operate by lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the voice coil motor 352 that gives an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that gives the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner region of the lower frame member 320 is largely used for tilting. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. As a result, a large amount of movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the rear side end portion (the back end portion on the paper surface of FIG. 12) and tilting thereof. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defining the push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed portion arranged facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. To the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and that constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from three sides in the left-right direction and the rear direction.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member having a mode in which the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 which is inclined downward toward the front side and the bottom plate portion 321 thereof. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the above, and a semi-circular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, which is a tilting device 310. The lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, the left side detection sensor 324L arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the bottom plate portion 321 horizontally at the center position in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening opened by scraping a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a plurality of openings so as to determine the moving end of the tilting device 310 by abutting with the tilting device 310, and the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321 through the openings. To.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. It mainly includes an insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. By arranging the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b in the detection groove of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c is configured to have a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the drive device 340 is operated. A through hole is formed to a position where interference with the 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is formed of a U-shape extending upward from the upper surface thereof and having an open portion on the front side in the cross section. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distances (positions of the detection grooves) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 are the same on the left and right sides.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width thereof is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), the drive device 341f passes through the opening 325 and then the drive device. By pushing the 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331, which is an opening having a size for the extending portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. It is mainly provided with an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed of a semicircular shape whose lower side is open and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be separable in the vertical direction and is configured to cover three directions except the front side, and is a main body cover 351 fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351 thereof. The voice coil motor 352, which is supported by the bottom plate and is arranged on the front side and the vibration surface is directed diagonally forward and upward, the left side detection sensor 353L, which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and the right side. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the center of the left and right can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). As a result, when the tilting device 310 projects the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phase of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. The disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged in such a manner that they are arranged inside the detection groove of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether or not the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 include the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2. It becomes a kind.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14 (a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a side view of the tilting device 310. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14A. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 has a case body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and upper and lower openings, and a cover is provided on the upper opening of the case body 311. A mode in which the lid 312 to be fastened and fixed to the case body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312 are sandwiched between them. A ring shape that inseparably fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear ends of the shaft portion 314, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and the case body 311 and the lid 312. Mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending downward from a flange extending downward along the edge of the spring, and a recessed portion 311d which is a semicircular concave portion supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And the insertion groove 311e, which is a groove in which both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 are arranged at a position where they can be inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 311f, which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A pair of left and right detection pieces 311 gL extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311 gR (see FIG. 15), and a stretch extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. A protective lens member 311i, which is arranged above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311h and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and a protective lens member 311i formed of a light transmissive material, and a bottom plate portion. It mainly includes an overhanging convex portion 311j that is projected downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 on a surface when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the drive device 340. To prepare for.

The left side detection piece 311 gL and the right side detection piece 311 gR are the portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311 gL. However, the overhang length is longer than that of the right side detection piece 311 gR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311 gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311 gL with respect to the shaft portion 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push-in end (FIG. 22). The left side detection piece 311 gL is projected as compared with the right side detection piece 311 gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to (see 23).

The extending portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and projects to a position where it is locked to the opening portion 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Consists of aspects.

Since the protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape in the top view (see FIG. 14 (a)) and a curved shape in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 14 (c)), the player can use the protective lens member 311i. The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is projected at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and its tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 has a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b having the top plate member 312a. It is mainly provided with a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), due to its positional relationship, the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical. While it is fastened to the inside of the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), it is arranged in such a manner that such limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is configured to have a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , A spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 by a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the twisted portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , Equipped with.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 (a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 is a side view of the drive device 340. It is a front view exploded perspective view of.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 is a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 that constitutes a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member and a drive motor that generates a driving force. A pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the 342 and its drive motor 342 and the transmission shaft rod 343 so as not to rotate. 344R), the arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second of the disc cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. The release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, the rotary claw member 347 that is pivotally supported by the release member 346 and that moves relative to each other with the rotation of the release member 346, and the rotary claw member 347 are tilted down. A torsion spring-like first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of causing the force to separate from each other between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. It mainly includes a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is formed at the same position of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right to form a U-shape in the top view and the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is arranged opposite to each other, and is a disk. A shaft support hole 341b that pivotally supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that is convex in the left-right direction at a position deviated from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side in a manner having a shaft parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. , An extension portion 341d extending from the motor accommodating portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending forward and upward from the motor accommodating portion 341a, and the illumination support portion 341e thereof. It mainly includes an LED device 341f which is arranged at the upper end and has an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light of the LED device 341f both upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixing member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is bored in a perfect circle shape at one end, and is bored in a rectangular shape at a shaft support hole 345a pivotally supported by a connecting pin 344d of a disk cam 344 and at the other end. Along with this, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a comes into contact with the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 makes one or more rotations on the opposite end. It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which a disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b. Mainly prepared for.

The cylindrical member 343a is provided with fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the fixing portion 343a2 on the right side is formed longer toward the center than the fixing portion 343a1 on the left side. To. Here, the fixed portion 343a2 is specifically formed with a length capable of moving to a position where the movable clutch 343c does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b is a clutch in which a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which a cylindrical member 343a is inserted and an unevenness along the axial center direction are formed at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged facing the movable clutch 343c. A section 343b2 is provided.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and an unevenness along the axial direction at the circumferential position of the axis center from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b. It also includes a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of a chevron-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having a top angle of about 100 °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged with each other. Therefore, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. This makes it possible to rotate the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) by rotating the drive motor 342.

The movable clutch 343c is usually arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the urging force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. As for the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R have a substantially mirrored shape, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR, so only the left disk cam 344L. The description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

20 (a) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. be. Note that FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b) show a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is at the center position of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a projecting inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b projecting inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. The engaging rib 344c, which is convex inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding radially outward at two points, and the outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d which is convex in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL which is formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other components are a mirror image of the shape of the left disk cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer circumference is fitted in the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). It is composed. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is projected to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, the misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c is the first protruding outward in the radial direction at a position deviated by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. From the overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 and the first overhanging portion 344c1 that retract inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50 ° in this embodiment). At a position deviated from the angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), the second overhanging portion 344c3 that overhangs outward again in the radial direction and the angle θ3 from the second overhanging portion 344c3 (angle in the present embodiment). θ3 = 20 °) Mainly provided with a second retractable portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a displaced position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. Since the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one of them will be described.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In addition, FIG. 21A shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 has a shaft support hole 346a formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). From the convex pin 346b having an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and protruding in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion overhanging at the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be in contact with the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly performed.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and has an arc shape centered on a shaft support hole 347a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and a central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide slot 347b is bored along along the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 so as to be able to guide (the convex pin 346b is bored with a size including the movement locus inside), and the end of the second spring SP2. It is possible to insert the insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d which is projected downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). It is mainly provided with a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21 (a), the release member 346 is arranged at the terminal position in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21 (a)) with respect to the rotary claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion is When a load in the push-up direction is applied to the 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle is small as shown in FIG. 21B.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in which the player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22. FIG. 24 Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand in which the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311 gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. The return of the spring is not in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 resists the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 that pushes down (see FIG. 18), and it is necessary to increase the size of the driving motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and the space cannot be saved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibration operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in. To.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in FIG. 23 in the extension direction, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player is informed. Since it gives an unnecessary load, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and when the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player repeatedly strikes. As a result, the player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (fanning operation) up and down from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a).

Note that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 shows that the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25, and the rotary claw member 347 The state in which the posture has changed is shown. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26, and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 returns. A state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and rotates is shown. FIG. 29 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. 29. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c is in contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be largely secured. As a result, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the intensity as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. When rotated in the direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346, so that the disengaging member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotary claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where the tilting device 310 is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a.

The posture change of the release member 346 is continued until the disk cam 344 is rotated until the first retractable portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises due to the urging force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the states of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 becomes an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, Due to the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotary claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 27). Return to the state shown in 25). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member The 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area visible from the player's point of view of the protective lens member 311i increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction by the same amount (FIG. 28 counterclockwise). By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 28).

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range thereof is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Fig. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 ascends from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 28, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c. Only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 29) and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 becomes the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 28. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force that assists the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and the purpose is to vibrate the tilting device 310 arranged at the push-in end position to produce a vibration effect. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 toward the end.

Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 to determine whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Can only be grasped.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 is not operated at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when the jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the value as a look-ahead means. As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction until the second overhanging portion 344c1 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346 (FIG. 29). By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction), the drive device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 and the engaging rib 344c come into contact with each other.

From the state shown in FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d and then rotates in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (fanning operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state (the tilting operation) ( The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (fanning operation) of reciprocating up and down through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). In FIG. 32, the state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31 is shown, and in FIG. 33, the state shown in FIG. 32 is shown. The disk cam 344 is shown to rotate reciprocally, and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the disc cam 344 is tilted. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disk cam 344. The tilting device 310 can be moved up with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disk cam 344 is tilted by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged). The 310 can be placed in a posture in which it can be arranged in the second state (a posture in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state in a short period of time from the state shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 interferes with the state change (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 33, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction by the same amount (FIG. 32 counterclockwise). By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 33).

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. That is, in the present embodiment, as an aspect of the vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (fanning movements), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. 33, are tilted by the rotary claw member 347. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the ascending movement of the device 310 is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to make two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342.

As a result, the operating member 310 can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big hit) in the operation mode as compared with the case where the operating member 310 performs the same operation each time, and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 33, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion). The 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into operation, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 33 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 is put into the first state. Can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotary claw member 347 after the player push-in operation will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (fanning movements) of the tilting device 310, or to continuously perform one of them.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). In FIG. 35, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 34 is shown. In FIG. 36, after the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35, the forward rotation direction is reached until the disc cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. The state of rotation (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) is shown, and in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. In FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c becomes the engaging portion of the disengaging member 346. Contact with 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 is changed by the engaging rib 344c pushing up the release member 346, but the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide slot 347b of the rotary claw member 347. It stays and the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 35.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344c and the disengaging member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotary cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the disk cam 344 goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. 36. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, as described above, it is possible to perform the vertical movement (fanning operation) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by pushing the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the effect and forgetting to release the operated hand. In this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the restriction by the rotary claw member 347 is lifted. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 may be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in the state where the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is used. (See FIG. 14) is controlled in a mode in which the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned on.

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not ascend due to the player's hand being placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. 37. The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is continuously placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) is maintained in the ON state when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is a circle as it is. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and an unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing destruction of the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. In FIG. 38, the player's hand that grips and fixes the tilting device 310 in the state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate idly with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a fixing the disk cam 344, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving in a state where the disk cam 344 is fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction via the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be disengaged, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. This makes it possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

If the player does not grasp the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disk cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operating device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and the third symbol display device 81 is notified to stop the gripping operation, for example. While doing so, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage to prevent a failure. be able to.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are deviated from each other. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state. By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with that state as the initial position, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. The control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are realigned.

As a result, when the effect is produced by operating the tilting device 310, there is a discrepancy between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. It is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform the effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 40. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is shown. Further, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CW is shown.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves upright toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c operates in such a manner that it separates from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c abuts on the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotary claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operation from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIGS. 40 and 42 both appear to be the same operation, and the subsequent movement after the first state is reached. Will be different from either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

For example, a difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in the change, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect to be performed, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is Since the direction is different only, it can be difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction depending on the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is operating toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the player confirms whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, so that the player can produce the effect. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player can see the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. You can make them watch over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. This can improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In addition, in FIG. 44, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in a predetermined amount forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340 is shown, and the first state is shown. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. ..

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 engage with the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not passing through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, since the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) according to the posture change of the release member 346, the tilting device 310 is in the manner shown in FIG. Even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and operated by the player in the case of vertical movement, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. It is possible to carry out an operation mode in which the claw member 347 moves upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues the vertical movement.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the operation is performed by providing a difference in production between the above-mentioned first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. 44. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the movement was performed or the movement was performed up and down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). Assuming that the difference is that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide a lot of timings for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

45 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45 (b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a release member 2346. It is a side view.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

FIG. 46A shows a state in which the rotary plate member 2347 rotates with respect to the release member 2346 to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 46B shows the release member 2346 with respect to the release member 2346. The small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the release member 2346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) has a release member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and rotation thereof as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). With the slide claw member 2348, which is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , Mainly prepared. The release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 have the same reference numerals as those having the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and the front end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b projecting in a hook shape toward the left side of FIG. 45, and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (FIG. 47 (a) in the vertical direction of the paper surface). Mainly a reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a convex pin 2348d projecting in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Be prepared.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is arranged on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that is attracted to the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotating plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The convex pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. As the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the convex pin 2348d is pushed to the side surface of the functional elongated hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides and moves.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. The support elongated hole 2347g through which the convex pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted is provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is forward-rotated on the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions arranged to face each other (FIG. It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on a shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) in a state of being arranged at the terminal position (46 counterclockwise).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with the convex pin 2348d inserted through the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. ..

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length composed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. Slide to move.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d, the movement speed of the release member 2346 remains unchanged from the movement of the convex pin 2348d without a time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346. It is reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also slows down.

As shown in FIG. 46A, in a large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the convex pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding and moving.

That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide and move due to the rotational operation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the pull of the slide claw member 2347 when the angle is large. It doesn't move. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

47 to 49 are drawings showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 47 illustrates a state in which the second retractable portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is arranged below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 48 shows the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 47. Is shown in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disk cam 344 is in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the release member 2346 is rotated clockwise) and returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by a magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the posture change of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will never be done.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the ascending direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by a magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is moved backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved ascending at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction on the ascending movement of the tilting device 2310 is lifted (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. .. As the number of operation modes increases, by associating the movement mode with the expected degree of jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the operation device 2300 for the player can be used. The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 rises due to the magnetic attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 can be applied to the tilting device 2310 by ensuring a large magnetic force as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, lift the player's hand in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in an embodiment.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the ascending direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be noticed. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state of being pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment has been described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or the state of being pushed by the player. To. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right side detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). It is provided with a left side detection piece 3311gL extending at a surface perpendicular to the axis and opposite to a surface arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left side detection piece 3311 gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311 gR, and its extension length is shorter than that of the left side detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are side views of the operation device 3300. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. None (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, while the right side is inserted. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the process of returning or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, and FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the end of pushing to the first state. .. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52B, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the push-in end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L. , The right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, which is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to give an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending. It is possible to effectively give a load for raising the tilting device 3310 by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is operating ascending rather than colliding with the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52B, the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly strikes the tilting device 3310, the ascending motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous striking operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 moves up as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 operates only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state of being pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has been described. Is an embodiment in which the tilting device 4310 detects the operating speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is projected in a plate shape from the front side of the overhanging convex portion 311j of the case body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the upper detection sensor 4321d, the lower detection sensor 4321e, and the detection groove (slit) of the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) arranged in the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection is possible. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300 showing the pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54 (a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54 (b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), and the front detection piece 4311k is detected on the lower side. The state in which the sensor 4321e has passed downward is shown. Further, in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e in a portion on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. It passes through 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passing timing, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 by the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which acceleration can be applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with the operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 becomes high. Therefore, if there is no means for deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies an urging force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the push-in end, and decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the urging force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who has decided to perform a gentle pushing operation, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it becomes easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a risk that the tilting device 4310 cannot be pushed in comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, when the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. On the other hand, when the timing interval described above is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled by driving.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

Further, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the pushing end is used as the reaction force against the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 overhangs below the lower frame member 4320. It is controlled by pushing the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 to the side close to the tilting device 4310 in advance.

As a result, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide with each other during the extrusion of the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. ..

Further, in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 is overhanging and convex while the tilting device 4310 is in the process of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the overhanging convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the push operation can be consumed to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, since the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction as in a disc brake, but a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force, damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the tilting device 4310 decelerates on the way from the first state to the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged at the push-in end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310 after pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to produce a vibration effect.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is attached to the lower frame member 5320. The drive motor 5411 for rotating the weight member 5412 whose center of gravity is eccentric is provided, and the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, as compared with the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5410 for rotationally driving a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is composed of a flexible material. The flexible member 5420 and the flexible member 5420 are formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, and the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 are separately accommodated and are fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. Mainly equipped with 5430.

The transmission device 5410 has a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411 is pivotally supported by a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan. And mainly prepare.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixed portion 5411a which is arranged in pairs on the left and right and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on the side where the shaft overhangs.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported by the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together with the drive motor 5411.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the opposite side of the insertion side, and the main body portion 5421 in the assembled state. A pair of rib-shaped legs 5422 that are convexly provided on the left, right, left, and right sides in the radial direction, and a rib-shaped leg portion 5422 that is projected left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421 are connected to each other. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a convex leg portion 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 in a pair of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth configured at the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the left and right sides is larger than the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 because the posture maintaining portion 5423 is arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422.

Since the convex leg portion 5424 is convex in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in the contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 has a first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and a second accommodating portion adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 and accommodating the weight member 5412. It mainly includes a 5432 and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connecting surface of the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is adjusted from the upper surface when the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom and the load applied during the insertion is released (assembly load release state). The depth is such that the convex leg portion 5424 overhangs.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 to provide a flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth is set to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly downward from the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. To.

59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59 (a), the portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first area S51, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310, and the player are pushed by the player three times from the first state. The end area S52, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the end position of the push, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the convex leg portion 5424 is convexly provided in the direction along the circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum amount of deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load release state in which the convex leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the convex leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extension direction view. Therefore, since the convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed evenly to the left and right on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (tilting to the left or right on the paper surface in FIG. 59 (b)). The convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d into which the convex leg portion 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and the lower side surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the shape of the convex leg portion 5424 and facilitate the translation of the main body portion 5421 together with the convex leg portion 5424 downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

60 (a) and 60 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 in the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 59 (a). Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows an assembly load release state, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the convex leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is shown. The outer shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembled load release state, and when the assembled load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic restoring force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the terminal position, the tilting device 310 is pushed back. The impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is ascended only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture in the assembled load release state. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started to be driven in the assembled load release state, the vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the accommodating member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60B, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced vertically due to deformation of the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 in the assembled load state. Consists of acceptable aspects.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged under the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and is uniformly spaced from the central axis to the left and right. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the radial outer ends of the rib-shaped leg 5422 move outward on the left and right (at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg 5422) as the flexible members 5420 move downward. It deforms in a manner of moving to the one with the smaller resistance) (see FIG. 60 (b)). In this case, since the convex direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right direction component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is partially applied by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a).

61 (a) and 61 (b) show an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side of the rotation axis. In b), a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show a state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the terminal region S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembled load state, the drive motor 5411 rotates at a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axis is placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof comes into contact with (rubs) the second accommodating portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared with the assembled load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61 (b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 are separated from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is set to the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ) Can be easily directed. Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). It is possible to reinforce the force to push back in the direction).

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separately the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. By configuring it with a combination of generated forces, it is possible to adjust the force that pushes back the tilting device 310.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the start of contact with the convex leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). After the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is applied to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the terminal region S52, so that the lightness of the tilting device 310 operation and the mitigation of the impact during the pushing operation can be satisfactorily achieved. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311 gL and the length of the right side detection piece 311 gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is different due to the difference in the detection timing. ) Is determined whether or not the operating speed is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to alleviate the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 61 (b)).

As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof is raised upward by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432. As a result, the weight member 5432 is located on the upper side of the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the convex leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10, for example, other than the portion touching the tilting device 310.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side surface of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing is used. Through, vibration can be transmitted to the player. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in the rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the pushing operation of the player can be detected. It is possible to make it easier to transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the motor.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (a pulsed pushing operation), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (the vibration does not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the preparation for vibration generation is ready, so that the vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. As a result, the player can experience the effect of vibration.

Further, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, it is possible to realize that the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed in a central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L have a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has a support cylinder portion P1 extending in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is arranged at the center position thereof, and the support cylinder portion P1 in the axial direction. Along the axis, a long hole recess C1 recessed from a disk portion in an axially symmetric long hole shape up to a position of about half of the extension distance, and a shaft of a support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portion in the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter of the support cylinder portion P1 equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recess C1.

The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole recess C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

The elongated recess C1 is formed with a concave cross section having a width slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the elongated hole recess C1.

Further, the facing surface of the elongated hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. This makes it possible to prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

The sandwiching arm portion A1 includes an engaging convex portion A1a that projects from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other side of the arm toward the opposite side of the arm. .. The engaging convex portion A1a engages with the tip end portion of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 is compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured for a long time.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the axis in the vicinity of the axis. It is arranged at a position that is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

As a result, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engaging convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63 (b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65 (b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is set as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a. Can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for the e-ring to touch the surface and slide it) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed width (diametrically wide) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the fitting groove 5343a3 sandwiched from the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side of the front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from a cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 that is a groove for fitting an e-ring and axially positioning the disk cam 5344 by the e-ring, and a fitting groove thereof. Mainly the engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages when the disk cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3. Be prepared. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Since the mechanism is adopted in which the e-ring is fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a part where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a by the e-ring, the cylinder is formed before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, so that the e-ring is formed in the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition to preventing the misalignment along the above, the e-ring can further prevent the misalignment of the disk cam 5344 in the axial direction.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the columnar member 5343a is the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 where the engaging convex portion A1a is arranged. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted into the engaging groove 5343a4, the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a are formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between the two is expanded. After that, when the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing destruction in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

65 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV of FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 65 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). 66 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV of FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is a right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player gives an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and is a disk. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging convex portion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of holding arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes small. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R. The resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes large because of the contact with the cylinder member 5343a.

Therefore, when the player forcibly presses (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). The direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in a direction in which the resistance is small, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, On a surface parallel to the surface of the disk portion, the disk portion is deformed by tilting around the support shaft r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 65 (a).

67 (a) is a sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 67B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to fall. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 67A, the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is shown in an enlarged manner. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 that tries to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L that tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is shown by an imaginary line. The change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to the enlarged view.

In FIG. 67 (a), when the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd due to the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), the shaft support of the arm member 345 is rotated by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned, and in order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67A due to the shaft tilt deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the convex tip side are right circles. The position shifts along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of the right disk cam 5344R, so that the drive motor can be driven while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the 342 (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be relaxed.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring is in a direction repulsive to it. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disk cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotary claw member 347 is dammed by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so that the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 repels it. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotary claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disk cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or the disk cam 5344 is operated regardless of the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. Of any of the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased by the disc cam 5344. It can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of.

In this embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed from a shape that is axisymmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). Since the elongated hole recess C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the misalignment direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can be tilted and deformed by resistance.

68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68 (b), the protective cover device 350 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 68 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to fall. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 68A, a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven from the second state by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) and tilted down by an angle D2 is shown, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 68A, when the player grips the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344R is used regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting of the arm member 345, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The matter described as the right disk cam 5344R is also applicable to the left disk cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period during which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right side detection sensor 353R. However, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the right side detection sensor. Since the input to the 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, since it is necessary to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle before the occurrence of the overload is detected, there is a problem that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66B), the overload is applied. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, a method using a notification device E1 fixed to the engaging rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engaging rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in pairs at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of holding arm portions A1 and an engaging rib 344c intersect. At the same time, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65 (b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 66 (b)). Thereby, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment has the disk cam 344 and the engaging rib. The 344c is composed of a separate member, and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. Is. The right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, but since the right disk cam 6344R is composed of a mirrored shape with respect to the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, in this embodiment, the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a are different from those of the first embodiment, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL arranged in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and a disk member 6344L1 thereof. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially pivotally supported and rotates relative to a disk member 6344L1 is provided.

In the disc member 6344L1, the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disc portion, and is radially outwardly separated from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in an annular shape. The annular rib 6344f is provided so as to be convex along the ring rib 6344f.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and having an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and a circle thereof. The lid plate portion 6344h is arranged at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. 6344i is provided with a receiving gear tooth 6344i, which is formed in the thickened portion and is arranged radially outward in the thickened portion.

Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

The end face of the annular body 6344g on the axial disc member 6344L1 side comes into contact with the annular rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the disk member 6344L1 is in contact with the surface. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i is meshed with the deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (in the embodiment, the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation while the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations). , The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the deceleration transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear tooth 6344i is set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary pillar member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a and its auxiliary pillar. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a deceleration transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. Mainly equipped with 6348c.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is configured by a plurality of types.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (correctly). A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) as well as a posture in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the reverse direction by the amount of the rotation after the rotation exceeding one rotation. Is illustrated. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 is raised.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is subjected to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the arrival position when the tilting device 310 is lifted in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c. The relative relationship between the two can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 and tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 momentarily (disk cam) in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 72. It can rise to (without waiting for the rotation of 344) and change the position to reach.

Thereby, for example, when the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state and configures the gaming machine in such a manner that the expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in the height reached, the attention of the tilting device 310 is attracted. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise lower is higher.

However, by keeping the ascending arrival position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is reached. It is possible to relate the magnitude of the displacement and the magnitude of the displacement amount that the player pushes the tilting device 310 into, so that the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can make it happen. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the method of the game in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disk cam 7344 is a disk member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. 74. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R in the LXXVa-LXXBa line, and FIG. 75 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVb of FIG. 74 (a). Since the right disk cam 7344L is composed of a mirrored symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a into which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. The ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member 7434R2 and the engaging portion 7630 that is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. Mainly includes an engaging member 7344R3 having the above.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed from a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a in the center, and has a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape and an engaging rib. It is a member having a shape in which 344c is partially omitted (between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on a surface in the assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a first circular recessed portion 7410 thereof. 1 In the radial direction between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a smaller diameter than the circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be drilled and a fixing that is projected radially outward from the back side surface (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) of the second circular recessed portion 7420 in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430. Mainly provided with a protrusion 7440.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first long hole portion having a long rectangular shape along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position deviated from the intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The long hole 7431 and the second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending from the bottom end of the disk member 7344R1 of the first long hole 7431 along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1. A return portion 7433 formed by projecting toward the second elongated hole 7432 side with the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum is mainly provided.

The width direction (short side) dimension of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short side direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outward of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is an arrow LXXVIc direction view of FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is convexly provided and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. Mainly includes a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and forming a star-shaped through hole in the central portion.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recessed depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and the outer diameter dimension is slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. To. This makes it possible to prevent the relative rotation resistance from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to approach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and have an outer peripheral diameter. However, it is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. As a result, in the assembled state, the engaging member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75A), and the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 is prevented from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 is recessed in the deformed through hole 7521 formed along the axial direction and the deformed through hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (divided into five equal parts in the present embodiment) in the radial direction outward. It mainly includes an equally divided recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. It is composed.

77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is outside the radial direction of the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)). An arcuate plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 77B) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and an extension thereof. It is arranged on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620. It mainly includes a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 which is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the tip end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extension portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction facing the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip thereof becomes. It is composed of an extended length that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630 is slightly shorter than the widthwise dimension of the first elongated hole 7431, and the engaging portion 7630 is extended so as to pass through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the releasing member 346 and is displaced, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 78. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a). c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78 (c), and FIG. 78 (e) is a side view. It is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf of FIG. 78 (e).

In addition, in FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d), the state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is shown, and FIG. ) And FIG. 78 (f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. Further, for ease of understanding, in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d) and 78 (f), the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown.

As an assembly method of the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an assembly error.

Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 to a position where the positions of the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide with each other in the depth direction of FIG. 78 (d). Moving.

At this position after movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 is suppressed from being displaced in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

Further, the engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward from the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is seconded by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

The tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in a state where it has entered the inside of the second elongated hole 7432, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 78 (d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. As a result, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disk member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1 with the engaging member 7344R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the radial outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. Due to this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned process, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backflip direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and others. Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the convex pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the ascending position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 is different from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion in FIG. 80 (a)) of the main body portion of the release member 7346 is slanted in order to minimize the interference with the engagement rib 344c.

In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 79 (a)). Is illustrated in chronological order.

79 (a) shows a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the release member 7346 and the release member 7346 starts to rotate, and FIG. 79 (b) shows FIG. 79 (a). ), The right disk cam 7344R is further rotated, and in FIG. 80 (a), the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2 is shown. In (b), a state in which the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 81, the right disk cam is shown from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after the 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is shown in the figure. In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), and 80 (b), the release member 7346 reaches the end of the range in which the release member 7346 can rotate relative to the rotary claw member 7347. (Small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2 in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start to come into contact with each other. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79B, the angle between the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 is small when the engagement portion 346d of the release member 7346 is in contact with the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the arcuate plate portion 7610 is formed in a small angle state in which the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320. The disk cam 7344 has a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c are in contact with each other. Arranged (see FIG. 80 (a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member From the 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backflip direction cannot be continued, so that the rotation of the disk cam 7344 is based on the rotation. , The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80 (a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). However, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one equally divided recess 7522 originally arranged to another different equally divided recess 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 The phase with and is rotated relative to each other by the amount of one recess (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. The engaging portion 7630 is again housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is displaced by one.

That is, by going through the process shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into the recessed portion 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82 (a), FIG. 82 (b), FIG. 83 (a) and FIG. 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and other unnecessary parts are not shown.

In FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 82 (a), the state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other is shown, and in FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 is above the release member 7346. FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). In (b), the state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, so that the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clock 82 (a)). When rotating in the clockwise direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Will only be.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 is radially outward until the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the releasing member 7346 and then separates from the engaging member 7344R3. Keep overhanging. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly tilt the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment. In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, the state that is not noticed by the player (the state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place that is not visible to the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is moved up from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disk cam 7344). ) The state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced is shown. , A state in which the disk member 7344R1 is rotated relative to the equally divided recessed portion 7522 by one, and in both FIGS. 84 and 85, the second overhanging portion 344c3 corresponds to the engaging portion 346d. The state of contact is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 from the first state, the tilting device 310 immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced to the rear lower side than the position shown in FIG. Move to a state where it sinks below the 2 state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 immediately reaches (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) by the ascending operation can be changed from the first state. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operating device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operating device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Further, the definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG. 86.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 in a state where the front frame 14 is removed. It is a front view of. In FIG. 90, the reference numeral of the internal configuration of the game board 13 is omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed, with the wooden plate material as the upper side and the lower side and the aluminum plate material as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement park by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 or the like) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. The member may be provided in the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It can rotate forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) when viewed from the front, and the right side is rotated. It can rotate backward as the moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. And, it has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform an unlocking operation. By doing so, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). By engaging the metal plate with holes) with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is recessed in a fitable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape protruding upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (the diameter of the upper columnar in a configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically). Is externally fitted to the support pin 19a (which has a small shape) and is pivotally supported.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (illumination portions 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in the front view (see FIG. 86). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back surface side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And have. The fixed frame is formed of synthetic resin into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the double glazing. Has been done.

The glass unit 16 is colorless and transparently formed by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. The glass unit 16 is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. If the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored transparent instead of colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated portions 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. In these illuminated units 8029 to 8033, lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, the illuminated portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c has a built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls and a light emitting means that lights up during the payout of prize balls.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member formed of punching metal) is provided to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state. .. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged so as to bulge toward the front side and are arranged side by side.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 50 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back surface side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to separately provide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 to store the game balls at a plurality of places, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is provided. Is also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (storage area of the game ball). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen or the like of the third symbol display device 81. The operation device 300 may be provided in another part such as around the lower plate 50 in addition to the upper plate 17, or may be provided in a plurality of places, and is a push button type switch as an operation method. It may be configured so that information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 leading to the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 leading to the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( (See FIG. 92).

In the upper corner portion of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving port portion 143 that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. By partitioning the 143 to the left and right by the partition wall 144, the passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and the passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion of the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that forms a passage for discharging the game balls that have not reached the game area to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with the ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which the unlaunched ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. Is formed like this.

On the back side of the front frame 14, the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge toward the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, there is a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the lighting unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and one end of the internal board of the lighting unit 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic board is disposed to which the other end of the connector to which the portions are connected is connected, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

In the portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring through groove 14h communicating with the left and right illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 and an illuminated portion 8031 through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Is done.

Therefore, assuming that the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illuminated portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conducting wiring and a connector for connecting one end to the internal board of the illuminated parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotation tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 600 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126), the positional relationship is such that they face each other in the front-rear direction with the device on the upper side, and they can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member having an open front side formed of a resin material is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a structure in which the cross-sectional area becomes smaller as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation tip side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a constituting the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring has a structure. The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14 and is arranged opposite to the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. Consists of shape.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame portion 14. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be curved in a semicircle in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upward extending wall portion 173c gently curves in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 rotates from the upper end position of the upward extending wall portion 173c. It overhangs to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be broken.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there is an upward extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (the part closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), and a part of the main body frame 14a, which is the front frame. On the rotation base end side of 14, an inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion formed of a resin material and is open downward, is disposed between the vertically long plate portions.

The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion that illegally expands the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and enters the game area to take measures against fraudulent acts. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire having a heated tip is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat melts the reverse cup portion 178 and allows the reverse cup portion 178 to pass through the long cover member. It also melts 173. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is detected that the wiring is broken. , Can make it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and is in contact with each other (close to each other). Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the property can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened in the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (progresses in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the gaming area.

Further, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who commits fraudulent activity through the piano wire from becoming large, for example, the lower wall portion. By arranging a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the cheating person escapes and to secure the cheating person. ..

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot determine it, so that the piano wire is supposed to be on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window portion 14c), the operation of further inserting the piano wire deeply is naturally performed by a person who cheats (piano wire). Can be done (without suspicion that the insertion is not working). Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the person who commits the fraud notices that the fraud has been discovered and tries to escape.

The detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be arranged on the back side portion of the operation handle 51. When it is arranged on the operation handle 51, for example, the detection device conventionally arranged on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the approach of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a has an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It is equipped with a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward the area between them, and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one on the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the protruding path of the plunger 702 provided as the launching portion in the launching solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electric signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launching unit 112a is not limited to the launching solenoid 701, and a launching motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a substrate 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates the portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side and the lower plate passage portion 162 on the main body side are opened toward the back side so that one end thereof can communicate with the through hole penetrated in the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) so that the end portion of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball discharged from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. To.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the payout ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. The front door side upper plate passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 that regulates the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162. .. The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game ball.

Further, an urging member (coil spring or the like) that urges the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the urging member is attached when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position by the force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is opposed to the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is composed of separate substrates for the locations where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the locations where the connectors CN3 are arranged. This is because the connector CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so that the transmission target is different, so the board is different. This is due to the intention of preventing malfunctions in advance.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components arranged below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled and shown, and FIG. 92 shows the window portion of the front frame 14. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below 14c.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14c, it is the front side of the upper plate 17, and it is diagonally upward to the right of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the front frame 14, and the covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the operation device 300.

The cover cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width similar to the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends, and the main body curved portion 371 having a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and the main body bending thereof. It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at the intermediate position between the left-right center portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side close to each other in the width direction, and merges at the lower end of the extension to form a front view V. A plate-shaped member that closes an opening surrounded by a hanging portion 372 having a character shape and a main body curved portion 371 and a hanging portion 372, which is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and has a main body curved portion 371 or a hanging portion 372. A translucent portion 373 that is fastened and fixed to at least one of the two, a left plane support portion 374 that is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and a flat surface that is formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. Mainly a right-side plane support portion 375 and a support groove 376 which is a groove recessed from the back surface side in the right-side plane support portion 375 and whose recess width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back surface side. Prepare for.

The curved portion 371 of the main body has a curved front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17 as a back side edge portion, and is an upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The back left edge portion 371a that abuts on the front side edge of 17 in the front-rear direction and the back left edge portion 371a are connected to each other and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. The back middle edge portion 371b that abuts on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction and the back middle edge portion 371b are connected to each other on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation unit 40. It mainly includes a back right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body, and is between the plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported and the right corner cover 380 arranged at the right corner portion of the front frame 14. It is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). In the hanging portion 372, a screw inserted from below is screwed into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed at a position on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, so that the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and producing an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is placed close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are 6 LEDs (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light upward, and 2 LEDs (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light downward. , Each placed.

Among the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then transmits light. Pass through section 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), it is adjusted to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373.

Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 is the first. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed as the state changes from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 that accompanies the change in the state of the tilting device 310. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the illuminated portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat surface support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8031.

The right-side plane support portion 375 abuts vertically with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right flat surface support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination unit 8031, 8032 is used. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portion 8031, the illuminated portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that accepts the lower end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 from entering from the back surface side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illuminated portion 8032 is assumed to have entered the deepest part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right side plane support portion 375. And the position matches.

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illuminated portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. Separate fixing portions for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d is arranged on the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a. The passage forming unit 140 is arranged on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 is fixed to the main body frame 14a or a plate so as to cover the passage forming unit 140 from the back side by fastening and fixing the main body frame 14a to another member (members constituting the upper plate 17 or the like). It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or the main body frame 14a is sandwiched between another member (a member or the like constituting the upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of the synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire having a heated tip, a piano wire, or the like is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 and melted), the front frame It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of the 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire having a heated tip is pressed against it, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side of the front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the upper and lower ends of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the foul ball passage portion Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of the 145, but also when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the exemplified wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. It can be prevented.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified for the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 and a through hole is opened. Even so, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, an exemplary wire is pressed against a portion where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and rear becomes thinner (a portion diagonally above the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a through hole is opened, and a case where the illustrated wire enters is exemplified.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit back member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the cylinder lock 20 is arranged on the operation unit back member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position to be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction mainly by ribs formed in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left-right long plate member. Therefore, a through hole 156 through which the cylinder lock 20 is pierced in the plate member and a screw are formed above and below the through hole 156, and a screw for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 is inserted into the main body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 bored vertically in a portion (left end portion) overlapped on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end rather than a through hole 156. Mainly includes an opening / closing restricting portion 159 projecting to the back side on the side.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is provided on the back surface side with a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. A protruding portion 148a and a screwing portion 148b in which a screw to be inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position corresponding to the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction is formed as a screwable hole. Mainly prepare.

With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the back surface of the operation unit are formed by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation portion back member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140. be able to.

The L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 into which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed at a right angle and the lower edge. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back surface side so as to partition the area, and the extending wall portion thereof. In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the 148c is formed in an L-shape that can be surfaced with the wall portion 158a in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Therefore, as an alignment when assembling the operation unit back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved up and down with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By contacting the surfaces on the left and right sides, the position and posture of the operation unit back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The open / close restricting unit 159 is a portion that is arranged in front of and behind the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) arranged on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and the details will be described later. Under predetermined conditions, it has an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by coming into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the back surface side of the operation portion back surface member 155 and is formed of synthetic resin, and is a cross section in the extension direction view in order to secure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of other parts of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, since the strength may depend on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible. Since it can be formed by the plate thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, as compared with the flat cross section, it may be a curved (wave) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular corrugated cross section, or a cylindrical cross section.

Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not as a part of the operation unit back member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the back side, or is fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a from another member to the back side. It may be composed of a metal part extending to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is formed of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. It can be prevented from being chipped or dented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the operator who attaches / detaches the game board 13 by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 may be injured by touching the chip or dent formed in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is arranged on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock is further arranged on the rotation tip side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are erroneously locked when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. can.

As a path for a foreign substance such as a wire to enter, for example, a path passing through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is traced.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies electric power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign substance such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured in a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels sick at the game result may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At that time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to be splashed with drinking water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) fail. There is a risk of

Further, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it has a separably independent configuration, it is possible to prevent liquids such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A recessed portion 15a is recessed on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep-bottomed recessed portion. It is not a perfect case, and gaps are formed in places (see, for example, FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps), passing through the inside of the operation device 300 and downward of the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17 (b)), and is further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is transferred to the drive motor 342. It can be hung directly and prevented from breaking down.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that a liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but since the other parts are covered with the bottom plate portion 321, drinking water or the like may be applied. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhering liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

With the above configuration, even if the player on the way back is splashed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. Note that FIGS. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG. 91.

FIG. 93A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 93B, the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and are extended to the left from the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are up to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harness connected to each of the illuminated parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is once arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 heads toward the binding movable member 180 from the relay board, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back surface side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side that faces the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93 (a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the side surface on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93 (a)). At a position (intermediate position) between the pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions arranged on the side surface) and can lock the binding arm portions 183, and the pair of binding arm portions 183. It mainly includes a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and having an opening.

The binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than that of the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section having a substantially horseshoe-shaped upper side and a fixed portion 181a having a through hole for passing a screw in the center, and the fixed portion 181a projecting from the left and right lower corners to the plate member 14d side, respectively. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b to be provided, and an intermediate stopper portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front end portion of the fixed portion 181a and having the extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96A), and a portion arranged on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d. It mainly includes a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of detent portions 181b at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thereby, the binding movable member 180 can be prevented from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the posture of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing with respect to the plate member 14d can be determined.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d and the harness HN1 to HN3. In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extending end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding downward, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area of the region accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (the region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stop portion 181c) is secured while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e is internally fitted into the portion on the base end side of the movable arm portion 182 to provide the movable arm portion 182. Axial support (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly connected to the flat surface OS1 offset from the shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape connected to the opposite side of the axial support position of the base end portion 182a are mainly provided.

The base end portion 182a is the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connecting the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the most with the plane OS1) in the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape portion outerly fitted to the cylinder fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the direction of rotation are extended from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the distance between them gradually shortens as the distance from each other approaches the plane OS1. It becomes the same as the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained to have higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept not intended for elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept intended for elastic deformation (low rigidity) depending on the situation. ..

Since each pair of the binding arm portions 183 has the same shape, one of them will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, the narrow portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion having a width equal to the width of the root and the wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. The binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 in the fixed state (see FIG. 93 (b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a slightly larger thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93 (b)), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 184a, and has an opening width wider than that of the large opening 184a. It mainly comprises a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized so that the binding arm 183 can pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. The large width portion 183b is set to a size that cannot be passed (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to operate relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). When it is desired to lock the binding arm portion 183 to the locking portion 184, the size (tightening condition) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging the binding arm portion 183 on the side of the small opening portion 184b. Can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided with a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted and fixed through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185. , Harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of 14.

Note that FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b) show a state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one of the limit states of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) show. In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing in the vertical direction). This angle is normally used in view of the installation situation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the game store (the situation where the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14.

Therefore, in normal use, the movable arm portion 182 may exceed the range in which the movable arm portion 182 can rotate with respect to the main body portion 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates due to elastic deformation and breaks.

Next, support modes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

Note that, in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown, and in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. To. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extension wall portion 173c is the same, it was extended from the upper extension wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e which is the axial support position of the movable arm portion 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c. The shape of the HN3 can be made to follow the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the shape of the bent portion of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature, particularly in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B). This makes it possible to prevent disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also has a rotation center point P57 as a center with respect to the inner frame 12 as in the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since the frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be opened and closed, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 96 (FIG. 96). b), also see FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed through the vicinity of a vertically long metal portion (a portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 96 (d)) constituting the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are fitted when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the fit (which is curved only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Depending on the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted and penetrated through the wire, and the wire is advanced toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out, and continuity is disabled.

Fraud can be quickly detected by controlling the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burnt out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the fraudulent activity is committed until the fraudulent activity is discovered (the early detection of the fraudulent activity can be achieved).

In this case, after the wire is inserted into the game area and the game area is tampered with (for example, after bending the nail to make it easier to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to launch a ball to a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent giving an illegal benefit. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burnt out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a risk that a person who commits fraudulent acts will not be able to collect the bills and the remaining amount of balls inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his or her fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, if you want to commit fraud by eliminating the risk of not being able to collect the bills and the balance of the cards inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, the fraudulent activity will be performed without leaving the seat, so that the pachinko / pachislot machine store can easily notice the fraudulent activity.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output. At the gaming machine store, the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed. As a result, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be easily grasped.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. The lower end portion of the ball guide opening 53 is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50, respectively. Each of the S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 is provided with the extension direction facing (switching) at least once on both the left and right sides.

Since the S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, it stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86). Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed in the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of replenishing the balls given to the player (when the balls in the lower plate 50 minutes are exhausted, the balls are removed from the Senryobako box. A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress) due to being required to be replenished or the like can be configured.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 each include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions whose extension directions can be bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. It has features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged on the downstream side of the first bending region NEa1 and on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. The region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 has a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. , Equipped with. In the description of the feature portion, the feature of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. , The ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na, and the side wall Na extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the extending end portion. The proximity walls Nc and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc are mainly provided, and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc extend from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by forming the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb so as to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface of the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) opposite to the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire, small diameter metal represented by piano wire, etc.). It functions as a surface, but the details will be described later. In the proximity wall Nc, the distance between the gap Nin and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an approach route for the wire HM to be illegally inserted, a route traveling to the upstream side of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance can be considered. A person who commits a fraudulent act will proceed while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a cheating person, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 inverted left and right, the wire HM can be completely entered into the gap Nin.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from further progressing, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held, and it is possible to quickly detect fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and further progresses, if the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM overhangs in a downward posture, so that the wire HM is further advanced. Even so, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the gaming area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). By forcibly opening the movable device such as the above to make it easier to win a prize illegally, it is possible to obtain an illegal payout ball and prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

It will be described back to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (more than twice in the present embodiment). As a result, when the sphere flowing down the ball removing passage 147 is arranged in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the spheres simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility that the balls are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that vertically connects the respective bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The left-right width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage portion 145a is formed so that the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 projects downward toward the front side.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage portion 140 is positioned as a surface position with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of the above is positioned with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a larger front-rear width in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when a ball stays in the foul ball passage portion 145, the number of balls that can stay can be increased because a plurality of balls can be arranged so as to be displaced back and forth in the upstream of the passage portion 145. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly displaced from side to side and up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being pinched and engaged between the upper and lower walls.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow bottom surface of the ball faces to the right. From the inclined plate portion 146a that inclines downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that is extended in a plate shape toward the back surface side and curves in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward toward the back surface side.

While the ball is guided to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 146 to be on the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a and flows down can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be done.

Thereby, the period until the ball passing through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While setting the width of the 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

Since the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a), the outer shape is larger than that. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed long to the left and right, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 118) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

This makes it possible to connect and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 to each other by fastening and fixing them to the main body frame 14a, while eliminating the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling to the main body frame 14a is defined in the order of fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500 and then fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are provided with the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. It is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other to the left and right by the configuration in which the portions are sandwiched and fitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are the main body frames. The state decomposed from 14a is shown.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is a recessed portion 462,482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side thereof, and the upper frame is formed by fastening the screw through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. It is a part for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole formed in the main body frame 14a, is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As an actual assembly procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIGS. 108 and 108. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 108, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 109, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R which are overlapped in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and the main body frame is formed. It mainly includes a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion 510 that is fastened and fixed to 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side, and in that state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed into an L-shaped cross section by extending the extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side in a plate shape, and is in an assembled state. In (see FIG. 86), the fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a and the substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, and a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512. It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 is provided with a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the board member 512 in a front view and the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the substrate member is in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

Since the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115B), the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are oriented in the left-right direction. It is possible to suppress the collapse of the. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the postures of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 511a is displaced to the right side by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 rather than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extended portion 511a is displaced. The outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the back side end portion as a surface at substantially the surface position with the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back side end portion of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end portion of the support plate portion 510, and the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of.

The substrate member 512 is an electronic circuit board (printed circuit board) in which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row curved according to the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. .. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the light guide member 540 are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see FIG. 107 imaginary line), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak to the light guide member. It is incident on the 540 and emitted from any surface of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 527.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The left-right width of the pin support hole 515 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate portion 510 from the front side in a fastening ready state, the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically and vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (protruding portion 566). The protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even if the position is displaced up and down by about the diameter of the above. As a result, after the protrusion 566 is inserted through the pin support hole 515, the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are moved up and down by the amount of the misalignment with respect to the support plate 510 to eliminate the misalignment and easily fasten. Can be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L comprises an inner cover member 520 formed of a resin material that constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is opaque to light, and an inner cover member 520 thereof. An inner lens member 530, which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material, is provided.

The right heavy plate unit 500R comes into contact with the light guide member 540 arranged to face the left heavy plate unit 500L in the left-right direction, and the front side end portions are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction and light. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and formed of a non-transmissive resin material. Mainly includes an outer cover member 560 to be fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 110, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 111, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown, respectively, and the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 which is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. The lower fastening portion 523, which is arranged at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and inserted into the inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions to be formed and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and an inner lens member 530 formed longer than the short fastening portion 525. A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of long fastening portions 526 which are inserted into the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and are projected from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

In the main body plate portion 521, the front side end portion 521a has a wave shape, and the connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in the short width portion (the portion closer to the back side) of the wave shape. To prepare for.

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that abuts (matches the shape) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion arranged so as to be inclined to the left toward the back surface side, and the opening portion 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals above and below, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect of light can be made different for each opening 524.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and is provided with a pair of fastening portions 522a juxtaposed in the front-rear direction and recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. It is provided with a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is screwed through at two places at the upper end portion and at one place at the lower end portion, and is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four upper and lower positions and function as a window for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed from a curved shape that projects to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back surface side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in the present embodiment, the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is recessed and curved to the right in the design shape between the above-mentioned boundary portions. That is, the surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is formed from a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the front surface side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a recess that tends to be a dead space is formed on the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a wave shape in which the front side end portion 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically long plate shape substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. Will be done.

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending to the right from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction. It also has support holes 531b and 531c through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in a corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back surface side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

The support hole 531c is formed in a corrugated rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can abut with the light guide member 540 is arranged on the back surface side thereof. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied in the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction so as to allow the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, it is possible to align the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and has a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending to the right from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. A plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction are mainly provided.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a and the light guide member 540. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that projects to the left toward the back side like the inner cover member 520, the left-right width becomes longer toward the back side (front end portion in top view). (Triangle shape with the tip).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 formed so as to project to the left from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, which is convex in a wavy shape and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a grid pattern on both the left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate that is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is turned to the left and right through the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The lens. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back surface side (LED 512a side) to the front surface side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing the light from the so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notched concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to be emitted from the surface of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but a transparent resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, and an amorphous olefin resin are preferable. Examples thereof include resins, polystyrene-based resins, and AS resins (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compounds). Of these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain a light guide member 540 having a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the LED 512a side end of the light guide member 540 is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed from a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end portion is slightly displaced toward the back side from the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530, and is formed from side to side. Is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. The degree of wavy shape is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that has less distortion after thermal bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and can be given a three-dimensional degree of freedom. ..

The details of the wave shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520 is located to the left and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. It has a wavy shape that is located to the right (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the two.

As described above, the wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material on which the concave portion is formed. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) curved in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + 10 to 40 ° C. It is done by pressing the substrate against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not destroyed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process. It is possible to suppress fluctuations in the reflection angle of. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 is inserted with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate and screws extending in the vertical direction from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560. Mainly includes a fastening portion 542 to be formed.

The light guide member 540 has no portion penetrating in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no holes at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The back side end portion of the light guide member 540 is positioned substantially on the back side end portion of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is arranged at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in the shape of a long plate vertically and the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. An outer cover that projects to the right in a region surrounded by an inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and the plurality of insertion holes 553. An overhanging portion 554 that is visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a protrusion from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear ends follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551a extending to the left from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wavy shape and is arranged so as to be slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. To.

The front end portion 551a is convex to the front side at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of protrusions internally fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). A setting portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the light guide member 540 on the opposite side, bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) that bulge in a semicircular shape in a side view toward the front side are vertically arranged. It is formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be a band-shaped light emission mode in which the light is continuously connected vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a deep recessed portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554. As a result, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the back surface fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is arranged in the outer lens member 550, but not in the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close to the right side edge of the support plate portion 510 (outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) as much as possible (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the arrangement of the screws). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

In the main body plate portion 551, the surface on the side facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and the light guide member is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The 540 and the main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 114 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 from being displaced from each other, and light is accurately incident from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. Can be made to.

The outer cover member 560 is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the main body plate portion 561 formed in the shape of a long plate vertically and the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. There are a plurality of elongated holes formed in an oval shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and the screw is inserted from the opposite side. At the upper end portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561, it is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and is the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastened portion 563 having a screw receiving portion 563a formed with a slightly larger vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561. A receiving surface that can accept the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 at the front end portion of the above, and has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a vertical width thereof. It is formed with a long hole shape with a long width, and an opening is formed with a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted from the opposite side and an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of projecting portions 566 projecting from the main body plate portion 561 toward the back surface side.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the covering cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to project to the front side. Even if it can be stably supported, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted inside (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, since the path to access the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

A method of assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a), FIG. 113 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a).

It should be noted that FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the convex portion 551b is arranged on the back surface side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the convex portion. The state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112B). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are arranged at the front side end portion of the right panel unit (front side of the front side surface of the light guide member 540). Since the number of screws for fastening and fixing the light can be reduced, and thereby the area where the light is blocked by the screws can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It can be made easy to see in a band shape.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously guided at the time of fastening. By applying a load to the optical member 540, it is possible to reduce the range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end (near the tapered tip) of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the left heavy plate unit 500L is combined with the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530. The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R constitutes a surface having a parallel relationship with each other along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship capable of contacting each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when the left heavy plate unit 500L is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. The panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are respectively fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and at least two procedures can be considered for the assembling procedure. ..

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, after that, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is right-weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing to the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, it is possible to assemble and disassemble in two steps, so the worker who performs maintenance etc. disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 by which procedure depending on the part of the part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the work time can be shortened.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid to each other in the plane direction in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid from each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted, the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit is united. It is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that travel inside the 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are fastened to the front surface. The left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R cannot be disassembled unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104). Can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that travel through the inside of the right panel unit 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. .. In addition, in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c), the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back surface side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right due to the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114 (b)), light is condensed on the side that forms the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side that forms the convex shape. For example, at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape having a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524. It can be used for directing by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (condensed or diffused) of the light effect executed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided and the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, the mode of light production on both the left and right sides can be different. ..

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also becomes the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the vertical width increases as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is smaller. , The radius of curvature is shorter than R2 (R1> R2> R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LED 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be generated can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light as compared with the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed in the same manner as the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1) and is the center of the concave surface. The shape is such that the normal line coming out of is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower end openings 524 can be increased, the light effect can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be directed to the player's eyes. It can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the openings 524 arranged to face each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 to be arranged facing each other with the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower opening 524 is formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the radius of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the radius of curvature R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, in a place where the degree of light focusing is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light is collected. In a place where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid excessive light incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the light emission mode of each opening 524 uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114B are points corresponding to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. It is placed in the middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary region KE of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is defined as a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the upper end of the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the lower end thereof. Matches the top edge of. Therefore, the light radiated from the LED 512a in the front-rear direction to the region KE travels in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114 (c)).

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the light condensing action is reduced, the light is visually recognized by the player. The difference in the amount of light is small.

On the other hand, by forming the light guide member 540 into a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface in the region KE, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. The durability of the light can be improved.

Further, by forming a convex shape to the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

For example, by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 without any gap. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from the vertical position of the region KE intersects at the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being darkly visually recognized in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary portion of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made to.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The effect may be performed by using the light that reaches the front end portion.

That is, a light effect that is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c but is visible through the front end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared. However, by setting the high hit expectation of the effect, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 from the front side end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree to which the player's eyes get tired can be reduced, and the player can play for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when visually recognized from the left side surface, while is visually recognized by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, and the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by a visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player can escape. Can be prevented.

By inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

FIG. 115 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end surface (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end portion on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to have a length of 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and has the same gradient in the left-right width dimension over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end face of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face becomes long, it is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower portions near the support hole 531b and arranged at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by, the portion near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is better than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface that receives the light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is increased, and the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531b is increased. It is possible to reduce the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. As a result, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front side end portion of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform (small difference in strength) with the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the foremost surface. )can do.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an arrow of an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of forming the light guide member 540 to be curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is diffused and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of curving the light guide member 540. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LED 512a that generates the light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant, the light emission mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not right beside the inner lens member 530 but is formed on the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (See the arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b). The arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

It will be described back to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. A unit fitted to (see) and supported from below, which is located at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 thereof. An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , Mainly prepared. Note that in FIGS. 117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is not shown (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated to indicate a model name or the like, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light to produce a light effect.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending horizontally from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the tubular shape. A cylindrical portion 405 whose shape is formed through the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 which are arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly prepared.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open sides, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is arranged on an electronic board, and the electronic board is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. It is a part that improves sex.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical misalignment of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. A horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed in a concave portion on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410.

The tubular portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is possible. Formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and is formed of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L, which is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner portion of the main body member 411, and the main body member 411 from the back side to the position where the opening 414 projects to the front side. It is mainly provided with a lens member 440 that is inserted and pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back surface side to prevent it from falling off to the back surface side and constitutes the illumination portion 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long left and right member in which openings for passing vibration waves (voice) generated from the speaker assembly 450 are formed on both left and right sides, and a speaker cover 27 is arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the lighting unit 401 are larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 formed through a slightly large inner shape and an opening 414 formed through the upper right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed with substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, when the illumination unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410, the alignment in the left-right direction can be easily performed.

The support through hole 413 is inserted through the tubular portion 405 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). As a result, the wiring overhanging through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back surface side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring to which one end is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached and detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that makes the lens member 440 visible in front view. The LED 14e2 is arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape on the back surface side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back surface side on the lower right corner lower surface, and a concave portion from the back surface side on the left corner lower end surface. A supported groove 418 to be supported, a fastening portion 419 which is arranged symmetrically in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that a screw can be screwed in, and a second screw which is formed so as to be screwable in a position closer to the top and bottom. Mainly includes a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the lower edge plate member 420 at the opposite position (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily perform positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state thereof (see FIG. 86). ), The load (weight, etc.) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the illuminated portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is formed through the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight, etc.) given from the above can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where screws inserted into through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is projected in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. It is provided with an enlarged rib 419a to be formed.

As will be described later, the expansion rib 419a has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e attached to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. It is a part sandwiched between and (see FIG. 125 (a)), but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, in the enlarged rib 419a, ribs having the same shape are arranged at three positions around the fastening portion 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view on the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and the wavy wall portion 422 thereof. After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extending upward from the extending end portion and forming an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421. It mainly includes an opening 424 composed of a plurality of small-diameter through holes that are arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the center position of the left and right (upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate in the vertical direction.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a are in contact with each other at the top and bottom, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is an opening in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) through which a vibration wave (sound) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 is passed (exhausted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 which are circular openings for passing vibration generated toward the front side in the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed through the upper frame member 410 at a position corresponding to the opening 414 in the front-rear direction. The light radiated to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is visible to the player through the opening 414.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends. It is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e at the lower end portion. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R has a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device that converts an electric signal into an audible audio wave so that it can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is inserted. After forming a space between the front assembly 460, which is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front assembly 460, which is formed with an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in the front view (see FIG. 100). Mainly includes a side assembly 480.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and at the same time, emits a production sound in connection with the game, and one end thereof is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connecting wire 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire composed of a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the terminal of the speaker connecting wire 453. By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the speaker lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is mounted on the front assembly 460 with the front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front portion of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received. You can play back and output with high sound quality without making it. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 has a main body portion 461 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and the back side is open, and a plurality of recessed portions of the main body portion 461 from the upper and lower side edges toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip. Extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 462 and the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the outside in the vertical width. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end portion of the main body portion 461 to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner portion of the main body portion 461 in the front-rear direction, and a main body portion 461. A through hole 466 that is circularly penetrated through the speaker 451 on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 that are ribbed from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and rear. A connection hole 469 through which a plurality of fastening portions 468 to be fastened and fixed with screws inserted into the side assembly 480 and screws for co-fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. And a front side recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back surface side to the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 has a base end side main body portion 461B arranged on the side where the through hole 466 is formed as a region divided in the left-right direction, and a center side in the left-right direction of the base end side main body portion 461B (FIG. 121). It mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M connected to the left side) and a tip side main body portion 461T connected to the center side in the left-right direction (left side of FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body portion 461M. The base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal end side main body portion 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between the base end side main body portion 461B and the rear end side assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds almost the entire circumference of the outer shape in the front view thereof. The back side wall portion 461H is provided with an inwardly non-returned edge portion (an edge portion in which a flange or the like is not formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Will be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screw inserted through the through hole 463a is inserted from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and the through hole 483a and the through hole 483a of the rear side assembly 480. It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened enough to tighten the screw. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a by sandwiching the upper side plate member 14e (fastening and fixing to the hard material by sandwiching the resin material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed to be smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is visually illustrated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed. The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. As a result, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed.

The passage forming rib 467 abuts tightly in front and behind the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 and bends multiple times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). It is a rib that forms. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being created on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protrudes outward from the outer shape).

The rear side assembly 480 is recessed in a semicircular tip toward the center of the vertical width from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 formed in a cup shape that is long left and right and the front side is open. A plate-like extension plate extending from the back side edge of the plurality of recessed portions 482 and the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 from the vertical width outward. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner of the main body portion 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped main body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side in a rib shape and a through hole through which a screw is inserted at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction are formed through. It mainly includes a plurality of through holes 488 and a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed from the front side to the back side at a position corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction.

The main body 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer circumference of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the back side plate, and the front assembly 460. It is provided with a front side wall portion 481H formed from a shape internally fitted to the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer circumference thereof, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are projected toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right at intervals that allow the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. It is equipped with 481Ha.

The auxiliary convex portion 481Ha is a pair of convex portions that prevent the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surface of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha has a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the wiring passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 is provided with a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. The screw inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a into the co-tightening hole 14a2 and the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and penetrates the through hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended to the extent that the screws are tightened by screwing the screws inserted into the through holes 483a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is projected along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 and is formed with a width that is internally fitted into the wiring passage recess 464, and is larger than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The speaker connection wire 453 is convexly provided with a convex length slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

That is, by passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the opening formed by being surrounded by 464 and the speaker connecting line 453. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing the speaker connection line 453.

The light passage through hole 485 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 is passed. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed from a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), The light passage through holes 465 and 485 communicate with each other in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 are formed in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib forming a bending passage (see FIG. 123) that bends by turning. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is formed at the front and rear end portions and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the back side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the back side plate of the main body portion 481. This prevents a gap from being created on the back surface side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed so that the front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at that time. That is, a compressive force toward the back surface side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 are elastically deformed in the front-rear direction to close the gap between them. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and may be bent to the left or right, the compressive force does not work well and there is a possibility that the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, the back surface is overlapped in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). It can be reinforced by the strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be done.

The rear concave portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front concave portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front concave portion 471. The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protruding outward from the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening of the opening 424. It is placed in a position that surrounds the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), for ease of understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 arranged to face each other face each other. Is shown in the unfolded state toward the front side of the paper. That is, by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically at the center of the left and right sides of the paper, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the back side of the base end side main body portion 461B of the front assembly 460. It is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the front end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately arranged vertically toward the left side. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are provided at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment).

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed at the time of assembly. It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

Since each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, the rigidity of the main body portion 461 is strengthened by the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. Can be done.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bending passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back surface side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the oscillating wave generated from the speaker 451 travels linearly, but in the present embodiment, the oscillating wave Ws avoids the passage forming rib 467. It will proceed.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is on the left side (arrow) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) arranged on the L side and closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the lower side, and is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion closest to the left and right direction). , Rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are alternately arranged vertically as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent vertically. It is possible to secure a longer path length of the vibration wave Ws as compared with the left-right width of the space.

This makes it easy to adjust the path length until the oscillating wave Ws passes through the opening formed from the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and suppresses the generation of a standing wave by the oscillating wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be caused by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front side recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b located above the recessed portion 461 on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction of (arrows L and U).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the recessed portion 462 and 463b.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that presses the wiring, and are formed at a plurality of locations (this) alternately up and down toward the left side. In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are provided at five locations).

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity of the main body portion 481 is strengthened by the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. Can be done.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). (See), they are arranged facing each other in the front-rear direction.

Since the actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be caused by the recessed portions 482, 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed on the upper left between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear side recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b above the recessed portion 482 arranged on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in a direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482, 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembly.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed down at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are arranged vertically. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position further away from the speaker 451 and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so that the output is output from the back side of the speaker 451. The generated vibration wave Ws (speaker) travels toward the tip side main body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an outlet. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T sequentially passes through the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120). As you can see, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the back portion of the speaker 451 is an opening and an opening 424 formed by an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, recessed portions 471, 491 (that is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box. Since it is in direct contact with the outside atmosphere of the pachinko machine 8010 via (see FIG. 120), the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 should be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being disturbed. Can be done.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is recessed 471, 491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out in the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase with each other. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can produce a realistic effect, and can raise the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In the present embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The internal space of the 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 to produce the game by the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws as a path for avoiding the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is stipulated. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extension length in the vertical direction, the vibration wave Ws (sound). ) Sound can be tuned.

In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480 are provided in addition to the above purposes. It is arranged in a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can be reinforced in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by arranging the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed in.

Further, the extended plates 436 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125 (a)), and the rib portions 467c and 487c, respectively. The 467d and 487d are arranged on the extension plate 433 and 483 side of the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the fastening portion 419 is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 433 and 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other to bring the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 and the rear. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portion 462,482 is a portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is positioned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is attached to the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, so that the recessed portions 14e1 are recessed. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and it is possible to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

In such a fraudulent act, a wire, a piano wire, or the like is illegally invaded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is the front recessed portion 471. In addition to being formed in a closed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage recess 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is inserted through an opening different from the inserted portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e with the tip protruding from the 450.

In addition, the through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speaker 451. It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which are the points where the above and the like are allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even when such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is easy to prevent the profit of the fraudulent act.

124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R in the CXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 124 (c). Is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124 (a). be. In addition, in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is shown. Is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the back side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side. The outer surface 481Ho (upper surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side and is fitted to the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that. This makes it possible to improve the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c is elastically deformed by receiving a compressive load from the rib portion 467c. Since the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed so that a compressive load is generated between the rib portions that abut each other.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (narrow) the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass in the intermediate main body portion 461M as compared with the tip side main body portion 461T. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the tip side main body portion 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front side concave portion 471 and the rear side concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body portion 461M. It is secured to a large extent in a manner that bulges in the front-back direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the tip side main body portion 461T and emitted at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear the deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

125 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVa-CXXXV line of FIG. 124 (a). b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of FIG. 124 (a).

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the screw inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to be fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419. It is a portion that sandwiches the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the expansion rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , Front side assembly 460, rear side assembly 480, upper side plate member 14e and metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is fastened at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (passing through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), whereby the front assembly 460 and the rear are assembled. It is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without going through the side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are co-tightened to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the back surface side is disposed inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the playback output is output from the speakers 451 arranged in the other speaker assembly 450R and 450L. It is possible to avoid conflict with the sound to be played, and to reproduce the reproduced sound with high quality as a transparent sound without disturbing the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are brought into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 125 (a)), while the speaker assembly 450 At the lower part, the back surface of the rear side assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480. The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) on the entire surface with respect to the upper side plate member 14e, but is in a contact mode in which line contact is made particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, since the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed by synthetic resin), but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that is done.

For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be disposed, or a glass member may be disposed. A member made of concrete may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or another commercially available member may be arranged.

In particular, when a metal member is arranged, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add thickness to the sound.

Further, it is desirable that the member has a high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like fall under this category. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, regarding the shape, it may be projected in the shape of a long plate, may be projected in the shape of a spike, or may be projected in a manner of being scattered in a rounded tip. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to the case where they are fixed, and may be connected in a floating shape.

The arrangement of the portion that functions as the insulator described above is not limited to the back surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450.

For example, when arranging on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a tubular shape, is arranged between the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator, and it functions as a rear assembly 480, an upper side plate member 14e, and an insulator depending on the tightening of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the degree of contact with the members (loads applied to each other) and adjust the acoustic effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) and the connecting hole 469 thereof. The upper side by a through hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in shape and a through hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the back side in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be fastened is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, in the fastening and fixing of the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 is not loaded. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened and fixed. It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be said to the relationship between the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and the relationship of contact can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. Note that FIG. 127 (b) shows the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b are separated back and forth for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward toward the left from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13 and is formed in a cup shape in which the central portion is open. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end arranged inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting to the front side toward the left in a state of natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 and the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a form a tapered shape that expands to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. As a result, the workability when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line of FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) are board surface support devices 600. It is a side view of the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 which schematically showed the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128 (a) shows the game board 13 whose left end portion has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. 128 (b) and 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly is completed on the inner frame 12, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly on the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding, some configurations of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the left end of the game board 13 is adjusted. The portion is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture of being rotated around an axis facing in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is supported. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve workability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). Rotate it so that it is close to the inner frame 12. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. As a result, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-shaped portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is provided in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the trailing edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the leading edge of the guide rib 12c1 in the top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly advanced by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side portion. .. Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the rear inclination at the time of installation of the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the rotating front claw member 620 and the regulated front claw member 630 (a portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to evacuate from the route, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the rear claw member 640 after rotation via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by changing to a fixed state. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not abut on the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (game). The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 126). Therefore, for example, the game board. When the right end of 13 is not sufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in the fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed in to close the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) with respect to the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end portion is fixed by the board surface support device 600, and the lower end portion is vertically positioned on the support bottom portion 12c. Is regulated.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end portion on the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board that is arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back surface is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection of the game board 13 in the rotation direction. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower surfaces are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, the description of one board support device 600 will be described and the description of the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. In addition, in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13 is shown, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board surface support device 600 is used. The release state in which the fixing of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 600 is rotatable to a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A regulated front claw member rotatably supported by a rotary front claw member 620 that is pivotally supported and a second shaft member P62 that is arranged on the front side of the rotary front claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the rotary front claw member 620. It mainly includes a 630 and a rear claw member 640 that is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 that is arranged on the back surface side of the rotary front claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the rotary front claw member 620.

The frame member 610 is a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. The arc recess 614 is recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along the arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back surface side of the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615 and a pair of rod-shaped regulation rods 615a extending from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). Mainly includes a fixing plate 616 of the above.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed. , Fixed in the support hole 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the rotary front claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotary front claw member 620 is a part of the main body plate portion 621 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621 thereof. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed to penetrate in a straight line through the plate portions 621a that are arranged facing each other on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the upper corner portion on the front side of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports that are formed through in a straight line on the back side portion of the plate portion 621a and the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. Mainly provided with a hole 624.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the regulated front claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotating claw member 640.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides, and is composed of a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction and an extension portion 621a2 that extends in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view, a connecting plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b. The rear side extension plate 621c is extended by tilting downward by about 45 degrees with respect to the plate portion 621c, and extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a from the back side end portion of the extension portion 621a2 toward the plate portion 621a on the opposite side. The front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d and the lower end portion of the hanging back plate portion 621d to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d. And mainly prepare.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be at right angles to each other.

The rear extending plate 621c is arranged so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb on the lower surface thereof. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134 (a)). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb begins to come into contact with the main body plate portion 611.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in the direction in which the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction in which the lower end portion of the post-rotation claw member 640 is separated from the back side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The regulation front claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate portion 631 formed in a side view shape by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. A pair of supported holes 632 that are formed through the plate portion 631a to be formed through the plate portion 631a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portions 631a are inclined toward the front side. It mainly includes an inclined extending plate 633 that is extended and a curved surface 634 that is curved and formed as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), whereby the free posture change of the regulation front claw member 630 is restricted.

The rotating rear claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and is pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in the released state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the tilt angle is such that the back surface of the game board 13 is in contact with the surface. It is formed.

134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process of changing the board surface support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. Further, in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a), and 135 (b), the board surface support device 600 is fixed to the multifunction cover member 171 and the board surface support device 600 arranged in close proximity to each other. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, FIG. 134 (a) shows the released state of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) shows the fixed state of the board surface support device 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 by simply pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the back side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward from the first shaft member P61). Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the regulation front claw member 630 is subjected to an urging force in a direction close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the regulated front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 is restricted by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the regulated front claw member 630 and the regulating rod 615.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotating front claw member 620 The front side on which the extending portion 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the regulated front claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner that it separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, from the time when the regulation rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a which is the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects the circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (FIG. 134 (a)). In (up to 135 (a)), the front end of the regulated front claw member 630 rises as the rotating front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the regulated front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the rotating front claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resisting portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. When the regulation rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the regulation front claw member 630 is canceled and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the regulation front claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

In the angle range (the range between FIGS. 134 (a) and 135 (a)) in which the regulated front claw member 630 rises and operates, the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630 is relative to the regulated front claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, the attitude change of the regulated front claw member 630 when operating due to the downward load changes the attitude toward the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). (Posture change), so that the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back extension plate 621c, so that the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a downward load to the regulated front claw member 630. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from tilting. In this embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship with the inclined extending plate 633 of the regulation front claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. This makes it possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Here, in the case of a structure in which the rotating front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 is arranged. Depending on the mode of contact between the multifunctional cover member 171 and the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. There is a possibility that it will happen.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13. There is a possibility that the distance will be shortened and the game will be hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional functions arranged on the front frame 14 are arranged. When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 notice that the board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

When the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state immediately before the rotary front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 and the regulation front claw arranged on the front frame 14 Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state or the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively). The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunction cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the regulated front claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), The regulation front claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the game board 13 restricts the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 in the state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed, the front end portion of the rotation front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at the position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the clerk to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, the game board 13 is 90% stable. When the situation that the front frame 14 is not closed is solved, and in this case, a load is applied to the board surface support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14. In addition, the board surface support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged so as to be in contact with the board surface support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 134 (a). ), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the game board 13 displaces the rear claw member 640, and the rotation front claw member 620 is rotated accordingly to change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since the downward load is not applied to the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d, so that the rotating front claw member 620 is passed through the rotating rear claw member 640. The urging force of the torsion spring NBb given to the game board 13 is applied as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the regulation front claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistive portion 634b is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the rotating front claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is used as the center. The non-resisting portion 634b abuts on the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases by that amount.

Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is located from the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) toward the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius gradually increases around the biaxial member P62.

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunction cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), and the second shaft member P62 is displaced due to the rotation of the rotary front claw member 620. The non-resistive portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given to the regulation front claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. 135 The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship in which the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the regulated front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Even so, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 is restricted to the front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. After that, the board surface support device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. That is, in a state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not abut on the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is the multifunction cover member 171. It is possible to operate while avoiding the interference of (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when the board surface is replaced). , The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board surface support device 600 is released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward on the front surface to rotate the regulated front claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the regulation front claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force and the rotation is continued as it is. By doing so, the board surface support device 600 can be released.

When the board surface support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the displaced rear claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front-back position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the back side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the released state.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to a change in the state of the board support device 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are different from each other. , There is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the regulated front claw member 630 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the operation of the rotation front claw member 620 and the rotation rear claw member 640. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member supporting the game board 13 are compared with the amount of displacement of the regulated front claw member 630. The amount of displacement of 640 is smaller.

Therefore, when the regulated front claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the regulated front claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return to the regulated rod 615 is restricted), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the rear claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the rotation front claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the rear claw member 640 rotates against the urging force of the torsion spring NBb and the front claw member 620 rotates. It is possible to displace in the direction of widening the angle between the rotating claw member 640 and the claw member 640.

Therefore, compared to the displacement amount of the rotation front claw member 620, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out to the rotation rear claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the game board at the position supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of 13. As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is shown in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is shown.

Further, in FIG. 136, the released state of the board surface support device 600, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, and in FIG. 138, the board surface support device 600 is at a predetermined angle (about 25 °) from the released state to the fixed state side. ) In FIG. 139, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is shown, and the plate thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

From FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing restricting unit 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is removed, but when the game board 13 is arranged, the front frame 14 is closed. Is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, since the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the rotation front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 138). The opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation direction of the rotating front claw member 620 is due to the action of the regulating rod 615. (Fig. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (Fig. 138 counterclockwise direction) are opposite, so the reaction force becomes excessive, so it is difficult to do with a normal load. As described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, it is restricted to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the extension plate 621c on the back side may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closure of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the rotary front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 , Interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

Further, in this state, when the rotating front claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is caused by the action of the regulation rod 615. The direction (clockwise in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the regulated front claw member 630 (counterclockwise in FIG. 138) are not opposite to each other, and can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above. Yes (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front claw member 630 can be pushed through the opening / closing restricting portion 159 to fix the board surface support device 600. Therefore, it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Note that FIGS. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back surface of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then flipped back and forth. .. That is, in FIG. 143 (b), the back side of only the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a is a base member centered on a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting and a right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The shaft is rotatably supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) that partially covers the front surface of the 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23 (a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. Mainly includes a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 by a hook or the like that elastically deforms, is arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and is a base member 711 formed of a synthetic resin or the like. To regulate the posture of the launching solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the launching rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launching solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A plurality of fastening portions 716, which are cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed. A mounting hole 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 are mainly provided.

The foundation member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which a rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted in the right corner portion, and a locking portion 713 in which a hook portion 723 is sewn so as to be able to be locked on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. The convex portion 714, which is projected on the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and the suction force generating solenoid 741 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)) are arranged to face each other. It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the metal member for cutting 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), and is inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane that is opposite to the facing plane 714a on the left and right sides, and is inclined to the right toward the back side. Mainly provided with a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( (Floating from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is in contact with the cover member 721 and is formed at a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the suction force is applied to the clerk. It is possible to notice that the generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened. Therefore, before the failure of the ball launching unit 112a occurs, repair (the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed.

The ball feeding device 720 has a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the foundation member 711, a regulated state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144). It mainly comprises a switching device 740 that is controlled to change state depending on the allowable state that allows the flow to the launch rail 730.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) is open from the light-transmitting resin material, and the cover member 721 is loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes through the rod-shaped portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722. A ball passage opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 arranged in a positional relationship slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passage opening 724. It mainly includes a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

The switching device 740 is a member made of synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726 and the suction force generation solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and the suction force generation solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not it is present, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the suction force generating solenoid 741, and a ball. A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward toward the distance from the ball passing opening 724, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. It is mainly provided with a regulated overhanging portion 745 which is extended by a sufficient interval and whose extending end projects toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 726.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage that can guide the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and includes a flow plate portion 724a that descends and inclines in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the radial direction of rotation. The rib portion 724b, which is arranged facing above the flow plate portion 724a and is extended downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape and is inclined downward as the extended tip surface toward the back surface side, and the flow plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c which is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), the sphere P8 abuts on the inclined surface 714b and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the line. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the cutting metal member 725 in a manner separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal are arranged while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged so as to project inside the sphere passage opening 724. It is possible to prevent the member 725 from colliding with the member 725.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends so as to incline upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 arranged at a distance shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) is arranged.

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the long direction are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. It is formed as a long hole along the direction and has a straight line (a straight line that passes through the through hole 731a and faces the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) like the through hole 731a for passing the fastening screw and the bulging portion 716a. 731b, which is formed in a groove depth slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731 when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716. It can be slid along the straight line to be emitted, whereby the standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulation groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and rolls with a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c that hang down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and is a base with screws inserted into mounting holes 732 formed in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c. It is attached to the member 710.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c in the longitudinal direction, and sounds and vibrations generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and is in contact with two front and rear positions on the peripheral surface of the sphere P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the sphere P8 upward. It is configured to guide you.

FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the feeding status of the ball by the ball feeding device 720 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c), the cover member 721 is not shown for ease of understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a regulated state (a state in which the supply of electric power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). In the case of, the regulation overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passing opening 724, abuts on the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the suction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulation overhanging portion 745 Retreats to the upper part of the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is lifted, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts on the front side wall of the foundation member 711 to prevent further flow, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, so that the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not abut on the front side wall of the base member 711. Will be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back surface side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Flow is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. be.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A plate with a sharp tip formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower blade portion 725b thereof, and the same plate as the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b. Mainly includes an upper blade portion 725c extending from the above.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back surface side of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower side projects upward from the flow plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to a ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the thread Y8 is treated when the thread Y8 is fixed to and entered into the ball P8 will be described.

146 (a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit 112a in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a), and FIG. 147 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit 112a, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 after launching the ball P8. In addition, in FIGS. 146 and 147, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of a part of the constituent members of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 stays in contact with the left lower edge portion of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), A current is passed through the launching solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously overhangs to give a launching force to the sphere P8, and the sphere P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a). )reference).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the game area, the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8. It is known that the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening by loosening it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by using the firing force of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture toward the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the thread Y8 moves while being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the launch rail 730 through the lower side of the flow plate portion 724a, and the intermediate portion of the thread Y8 is the flow plate portion 724a. Since the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface, the thread Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c protruding above the flow plate portion 724a, and enters the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. ..

When the player holds the front end (the other end) of the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is loaded by applying a load due to the firing of the ball P8 to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subject to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the thread Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the thread Y8, but in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and is inside. It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much the load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the effect operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The composition of is almost the same.

The effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is arranged on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advance / retreat operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance / retreat operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance / retreat operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third. It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in (an operation including at least one of an operation of retracting the display area of the symbol display device 81 toward the outside), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other. The end of the drive side arm member 910 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100, and the drive force of the drive motor 921 is transmitted via the arm gear 924 to drive the drive side arm member 910 and the drive side arm member 910. The drive motor 921 that generates the drive force, the transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears that transmit the drive force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and the rotation operation of the drive side arm member 910 are interlocked with each other. On the left and right sides of the thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction, the thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and the drive side arm member 910. It mainly includes a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800.

Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It includes a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

The central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to the position on the right side of the upper end portion of the central main body of the support base material 801 and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is moved to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 801P is bored at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801 and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, there is a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which the detection arc plate 880d of the play fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long substantially oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region thereof from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion constituting the upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion constituting the region below the upper end region.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that extends slightly long in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable up and down as described later, the support base material 801 is arranged so as to be movable up and down. It is possible to reduce the operating space when the 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than being formed into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are interlocked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the positions of the openings 801P, respectively, as described later. It can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, it can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. Arranged to the right (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a posture of slightly tilting to the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the space between the support base material 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from being widened, via the drive side arm member 910. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In addition, in FIGS. 155 and 156, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. It is formed as a member of the above, and is provided with a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back surface side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer circumference (see FIG. 154). ).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petals 802, and the peripheral edges also have irregular irregularities in the front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are molded into substantially the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is such that the specific color (red) becomes darker without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S having a screw hole inside, extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at two locations, near the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. There is.

The petals 802 are from the rear side portion 802a rather than the rear side portion 802a arranged on the tip round shape side (front view counterclockwise side, right side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp tip shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The anterior portion 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the anterior side of the posterior portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the posterior portion 802a is superimposed on the posterior side of the anterior portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other, thus five. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear position, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped in the front-rear direction at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationship can be matched, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

The five petals 802 as a whole in the arranged state have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member fixed to each of the five petals 802 and separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and the outer peripheral edge portion thereof has a shape extending forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S extending rearwardly in a cylindrical shape and having a screw hole inside are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated from the member 803 (in the lateral direction).

The screw-in portion 803S is formed in an arrangement that is substantially located on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side wall of the flat plate member 803. The slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screwed portion 803S. As described above, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwed portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), on the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803, screw insertion holes are provided inside at two locations corresponding to the screwing portions 802S of the petals 802, respectively, and the petals 802 are provided on the front side. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screwed portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is abutted from the front to the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803, and the screw is screwed from the rear side, whereby the flat plate member 803 is attached to the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-shaped member having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

It will be described back to FIG. 156. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, with two adjacent locations out of five equidistant locations in the circumferential direction and one in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. The screwing portion 813S having a screw hole inside the extension is integrally formed, and the positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 813S is not formed among the above-mentioned five locations. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwed portions 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the central slit 814 has only an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

The side slits 815 are formed so as to extend in parallel on both sides of the center slit 814 with a slight gap.

As described above, a set consisting of three slits of the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides thereof are formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals) from each other. Each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost side slits 815 in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits are both side slits. It has a shape that is approximately rectangular in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Includes an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape that coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides are formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set consisting of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged and formed more closely so as to be close to each other inward, which also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 compact.

In other words, if the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. However, in the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 can be laid out more closely, and the slit member 810 can be laid out by that amount. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is small at both ends of the slide member 820 so that the tip portion has a semicircular shape in front view. The extension portion to be molded, the central portion where the thickness is larger than that of the effect portion at the position between the extension portions, the screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extension portion, and the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 that is projected from the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side. To prepare for.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is in a posture in which the extending direction and the elongated direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles with each other. And are arranged so as to span the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810 from the front side. When fully fitted, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, a screw with a washer (washer head screw) 824 is inserted into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and is screwed into the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so that it slides in.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In the description of FIGS. 160 and 161 with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

As described above, the rotary plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 the rotary plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall having a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side.

The guide rail 832 has a shape in which a peripheral wall extends forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 so that the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830 so as to be closed in a loop shape in a front view. It is integrally formed with the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge angle portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to fall off.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the front-view clockwise direction along a direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line of the pivot opening 831 and the normal line, and thereafter. It extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved in an arc shape toward the front clockwise direction side from this intermediate direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the side end of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof projects toward the front side of the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 from the front end portion.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are arranged at equal intervals in the pivot opening 831. It extends from the surroundings to the outside in a spiral shape.

On the rear side surface of the rotary plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on the outer periphery thereof is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 locally bulges at five points as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830. The pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotary plate 830 is smoothly and rotatably supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161A, a third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the second gear 830G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the second gear 830G. , Arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, there are three locations on the rear peripheral wall portion 815 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screwing portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is formed at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned with respect to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. Positioning is performed by inserting 813a (see FIG. 156) into the positioning hole 810c, and fixing is performed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off to prevent the rotating plate 830. Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the central axis rotation device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 is a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852 thereof. A flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand the diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, whereby a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction is formed. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two front screw holes 857 having internal screw holes on the left and right sides of the lumen 856, and the front screw hole 857 to the lumen 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend slightly forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. .. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the lumen portion 856, it extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing positions, extends further to the rear from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and inwardly. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, the rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed so as to project rearward at a position equidistant from both rear screwing portions 853 at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

On the LED board 861, a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and screwing the screw into the front screwing portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. , The LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, the LED substrate 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 having a size capable of fitting the screwing portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are one central location and a large number of locations that are arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles that spread multiple times (double) around this one location. Each of the LEDs 865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of places arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed toward the rear.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. The central decorative member 868 is made of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, extending in a columnar shape from a long plate-shaped base to the back side, and a screw can be screwed into the central part. A pair of screw-in portions 869 in which screw holes are formed are provided.

The screw-in portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. The screwing portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is abutted from the front side to the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 sandwiching the LED board 861, and the screw is screwed into the screwing portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. Thereby, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED substrate 861.

The free fitting device 880 is coaxial with a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner peripheral surface slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter. It mainly includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large-diameter cylindrical member 882, which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and a main body cylindrical member 883 that is rotatably fitted to each other.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has a screw-in portion 883S integrally extending in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and having a screw hole inside, in each of two places where one is skipped out of four places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the above-mentioned four locations where the screwing portion 883S is not formed.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in a rib shape in the outer diameter direction with the same protrusion length as the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at a position intermediate in the circumferential direction of the corresponding four locations, and is also axial. A sliding rib 883b extending over is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) and the decorative member 884 thereof are outside. With the back cover 886, which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, and the outer peripheral side of the fastened portion rises to the front side to form a cup shape with a bottom, and the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is abutted from the back side and fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

The front and back surfaces of the back cover 886 are entirely plated (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-shaped. Therefore, for example, the light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that produces light emission by being irradiated with light from LEDs 856 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, constitutes the shape of a hibiscus flower, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property and a back side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. An opening 885 is provided in the central portion so as to be large enough to allow the central decorative member 868 to be inserted.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this way is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The free fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161A, a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the third gear 810G. It is rotatably pivotally supported by the support base material 801 and meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the third gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and a screw insertion hole is formed around the pivot opening 880a at a position corresponding to two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a in the 880b.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be overlapped with the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. The 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screwing portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and is slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a screw insertion hole 880b and a detection arc plate 880d extending to the back surface side in an arc shape centered on a rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recess 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and the member passing through the donut-shaped recess 801D is detectablely arranged. It is detected by the coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the posture in which the fourth gear 880G starts rotating, it is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the detection arc plate 880d (minimum angle). 72 ° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central axis rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, their respective rear ends slightly project rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and also from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear side screwing portion 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out to the rear through the lumen portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to project forward with respect to the support base material 801. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is externally fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged at eight points along the circumferential direction by the screwing portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b, so that the rear peripheral wall portion of the slit member 810 is formed. The slit member 810 is in linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the 813, so that the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is formed. It is supported smoothly and freely.

FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800, the drive side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advance and retreat operation) by being applied with a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and is a member in the lower left corner of the front view. A support column 1110 projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed so as to be accommodating from the front side above the support column 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the above, and the support elongated hole 1140 drilled as an elongated hole that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support pillar 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly prepared for.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910, and is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right near the outer periphery of the front end portion thereof so that screws can be screwed into the support column 1110. It includes a screw-in portion 1111 to be formed, and a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side in a pair of upper and lower parts on the same surface as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape in the rear view, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and a support column. A rotating shaft hole 911 that is rotatably supported by 1110, and a connecting convex portion 912 that is convexly provided in a columnar column on the front side at a position near one end of a long main body member. The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the main body member of the shaku to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support portion 914 and a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted in the transmission slot 913 and a flange portion 926 extending outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected while slightly intersecting with each other, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. The first accommodating portion 1121, the second accommodating portion 1122 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121, and the second accommodating portion 1122 are arranged in the opposite direction of the first accommodating portion 1121 and the drive side arm member. It mainly comprises a third accommodating portion 1123 in which the arm gear 924 fitted to the 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and supported so as to be slidable up and down. It is provided with an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line. Due to the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operating device 800 is kept constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° when viewed from the front, and is arranged from the vicinity of the outer circumference. It is provided with an extension wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed in a substantially linear shape in a rear view, and is provided in a columnar shape toward the back side at one end and has a back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by a support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 with the collar fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the support elongated hole 1140.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of supported elongated holes 931 (three locations in the present embodiment) so as to be slidable to the left and right on the side substrate 1000S, and is supported by a plurality of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side elongated hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction arranged on the left end side, and is arranged on the right end side. It is connected to the second effect member 940 by the tip side insertion hole 933 which is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base end side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the stop portion 932a formed at the upper end portion along a locus in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. It mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S has a cylindrical portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in the front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support pillar portion 1150, and has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is arranged at a position corresponding to the support pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. The support convex portion 1002S, which is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface in the positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and the right corner portion in the front view, is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. The convex portion 1005S, which is convexly provided on the front side along the arc shape having the same center as the above, is mainly provided.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip thereof of the supported convex portion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. It is arranged in the gap between the two, and is configured as a portion that supports the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable by screwing a screw for preventing the slide plate 930 from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S in that state.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the convex portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The ridge portion 1005S is formed at a convex height that does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the normal position, but can abut if the second effect member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position. Will be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion in which the lower end portion is formed in a bifurcated manner and the upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support column portion 941. Axial support column 941 that is convexly provided in a columnar shape and pivotally supported by sandwiching a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary convex that is arranged close to the shafted support column portion 941 and is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface. The unit 942 and the like are mainly provided.

The shafted strut portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having a slightly smaller outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). A screw-in portion 941a with a disc-shaped lid member 945 having a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S arranged at the tip of the shaft support support portion 941 while being inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar sandwiched between them. By screwing the screw into the lid member 945, the lid member 945 serves to prevent it from coming off. As a result, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the tip side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip to prevent the slide plate 930 from coming off. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 comes into contact with the arc recess 1004S and causes resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and the arm gear 924 in a predetermined angle range in the out-of-diameter direction. A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 overhanging, a shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports the collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates an urging force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800, and a support slot. A cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangle shape in front view so as to support the board cover 1000C in the lower right of 1140, and a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged in close proximity to the cover support portion 1164 and hidden by the board cover 1000C in front view. It mainly includes a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side substrate 1000S includes screwing portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screwing portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effecting member 940 at a slight distance from the second effecting member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 is missing, the screwed portion 1006S is used to make the second effect member 940. 2 The displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is laminated and fixed to the side base materials 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are laminated and fixed to each other in the front-rear direction, thereby fastening and fixing the substrate cover. The 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easier to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S even when the petal operating device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. 1100 is a front view, and FIGS. 169, 171 and 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 show a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 show the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is arranged at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the drive side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the moving range, the transmission slot 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is an inwardly fitted convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (FIG. 169). (Refer to 151), it extends in the tangential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (idle rotation range), so that the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 is reduced. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171 the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as interlocking. Can be made to.

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 so as to project toward the originally arranged position of the petal operation device 800, the second effect member 940 operates following the petal operation device 800. It can be visually recognized as if it were.

Next, the collection / dispersion rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central axis rotating device 850. It is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. Is a front view showing through the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central axis rotating device 850. It is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operation device 800 descends due to the elevating operation and is in the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 expands from the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to the expansion shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. After passing through the middle position, the expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the rotation operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position, and then the gathering operation (third operation) is performed. It is configured so that it can return to the initial position (gathering position) by performing operation).

In the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is the inner end (circular opening 811 side end) of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810. As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are located at the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole is located. It is in a state of gathering that constitutes a flower.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (concentration position) as described above, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the counterclockwise direction as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c), this is observed. By interlocking the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)), the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831, it can be easily wrapped around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotary plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotary plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front as shown by the arrow A11 on the front surface thereof. Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 is linearly linear from the inner end to the outside along the central slit 814. Guided by to move.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding outward from the gathering position. In this expanding operation, as described above, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is tilted in the counterclockwise direction of the front view by an angle θ11 with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination. Will be faster.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount (angle) of the rotating plate 830. The 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small as compared with the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, assuming that the central slit 814 is tilted clockwise with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. The decline is even more pronounced.

Further, at this time, as described above, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends from the central end to the front clockwise side along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831. After that, the shape extends outward while curving in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, and extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. ..

As the guide rail 832 is tilted clockwise in this way, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower. Further, as the guide rail 832 curves in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, the decrease in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed become more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining the rail 832 clockwise and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of deviation. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 should be increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured in.

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823 to prevent problems such as deviation and ensure the certainty of power transmission, while the central slit 814 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823. , The structure is divided into roles.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially and becomes fully open, and the expansion operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 are moved so as to be radially dispersed, so that the position is continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in the front view. The petals 802 are arranged in. As a result, compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), it is integrally visually recognized as a flower of a hibiscus that is one size larger (FIG. FIG. 178 (b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move further outward, the slide pin 823 is subsequently locked to the outer end of the central slit 814. Therefore, the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate any more in the same direction as before with a small torque lower than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state can be maintained after the expansion operation is completed.

After the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts the rotation in the counterclockwise direction of the front view indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expansion operation, the petals 802 rotate in the front-view counterclockwise direction in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotational power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the rotation power is immediately applied to the rotary plate 830 so that the expansion operation and the rotation operation are continuous immediately. Can be migrated.

When the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (clockwise in the front view) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is rotated. While being dampened by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first, only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction of the rear view as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), whereby the expansion operation is performed. Is a gathering operation in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 to the inner end which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, five sets of petals 802 are transferred from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 in the center. It gathers toward it, returns to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, returns to the gathering state, and completes the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without stopping, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first gear 804G is further rotated by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction of the rear view indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petals 802 are shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). It rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front in a gathered state.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view clockwise direction in the aggregated state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view counterclockwise) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 is larger, so that the petal 802 has a larger movement amount. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

From this gathering operation to the rotational operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above, it is possible to temporarily stop and then shift after a while, or to shift immediately so as to be continuous without a pause. It can also be.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by passing the detection arc plate 880d through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so that the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotational operation.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 the passage forming unit 9140 has the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the lower end portion and the front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion below the S-shaped path SL2. .. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-shaped portion 152 is bent and formed toward the front side in such a manner that the notch 9145b is covered from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 abuts on the lower surface of the upper stop convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back surface side, and is upward generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, the possible fraudulent activities will be described.

It will be described back to FIG. 148. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the firing force of the ball. If the firing force is weak, the thread Y8 is cut. The ball was sometimes fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower plate 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly launched, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146 to the other end of the thread Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back surface side (launch solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725, so that even if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the thread Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The pre-launched ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits a fraudulent act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, whereby the ball P9 can be won. It is possible to repeatedly pass through 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and it is possible to obtain an illegal profit.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is used for fraudulent activity as described above, a thin plate blade is passed through the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when the cheating person pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, so that the thread Y8 is damaged and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed toward the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is brought when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can abut on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145 to increase the resistance to an upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the payout ball can easily damage the thread Y8. That is, since a person who commits fraud is afraid of discovering the fraud, after grasping the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, a pocket of trousers, etc.). ), It is easy to perform fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched at a position about the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

When the prize ball is paid out in this state, the ball discharged from the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side to the lower plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, and the ball guide opening. While stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the 53 and hitting the thread Y8, the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right, and the bottom opening arranged behind the ball pulling lever 52. Flow down through. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the thread Y8, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that inclines downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it possible to easily give a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 via the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.

As a result, the ball can be directed toward the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 diminishes. That is, since the right-sloping surface 9142a can forcibly give the lower plate 50 a velocity component toward the right (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side) to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction, among the balls to be discharged, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side occupies a region of about two-thirds of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53. The lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the boarding restriction step portion is formed at the boundary. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a has a right end portion (right end side) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction while connecting to the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed on the upper side of the boarding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 causes the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and the foul ball passage portion. 9145 is communicated with. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side before passing through the ball guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the thread Y8.

The width of the riding control step portion 9053a in the vertical direction is set to be equivalent to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the boarding control step 9053a allows the ball to pass in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment has been described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 184 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above right, FIG. 185 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 on the left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion on the upper side of the S-shaped path SL2. Then, the sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side in a manner of covering the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180). The radius. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d at which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is provided. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back surface side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to be convex from the side surface on the back surface side to the back surface side. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is a sphere. The radius is about Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, and the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 collide with the ball P8 to crack or chip. This can be prevented and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed from an inclined shape extending toward the back surface side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (to the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 becomes wider as it is closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily inserted into the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. It is a portion constituting the forked blade portion of 10153 and extends to the left in a manner of slightly ascending and tilting from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. As a result, an acute-angled recess 10155 having an acute recessed deep portion is formed between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portions 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the notch 10145c on the back side edge. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the thread Y8 can enter the acute angle concave portion 10155, and the thread Y8 can be easily damaged.

The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the thread Y8 is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who commits fraudulent activity. Can easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portions connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are configured to abut on the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged so as to face the left and right sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the opposite direction. To. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

For example, a cheating person tries to avoid the discovery of cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, the thread Y8 or the ball P8 is loaded in the opposite directions at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stops.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are kept inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the game area is lengthened, so that the detection of fraudulent activity can be accelerated.

An adhesive member (glue, birdlime, etc.) may be arranged in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 so as to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheating person is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member arranged in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since it is not discharged from the yarn and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) whose firing intensity is weak and does not reach the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described, but the plate passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment has the foul ball. It is equipped with a foul ball receiving entrance 2164 to receive. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged from the resin material so as to be arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game region side. A guide member formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 having a width at which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a formed and placed close to the ball launch unit 112a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b and.

Downstream of the gap V11, a foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with the foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side is formed. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through the furnishing, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above the width.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 The formation is omitted. That is, the balls discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, the full tank switch (not shown) arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the payout device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the payout device is turned on. The payout of balls from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering a fraudulent act as described above, in which balls are adhered to both ends of the thread Y8 and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c so that the thread Y8 is inserted into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, by hitting the payout ball against the thread Y8, the action of damaging the thread Y8 can be generated regardless of how the balls of the upper plate 17 are accumulated. This makes it easier to cut the thread Y8 at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In addition, in FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 arranged in the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the return ball prevention member 68, the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 in a posture arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back surface side of the return ball prevention member 68. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed, which is cylindrically projected from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b and has a screw-in groove for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A blocking plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is surface-contacted with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4 in advance to the base member 68b1. The long screw B11 is inserted into the through hole drilled as the mounting hole and the through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position with the through hole, and in that state, the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2. By being inserted, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side that abuts on the guide member 2062b match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that inclines downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is lower than the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment). , About 1/3 below the diameter of the sphere) intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is launched toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. You can avoid that. On the other hand, when a ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a notch 2062b1 having a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and a width (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment) that the thread can enter with the closing plate 2062b4. It is recessed to the back side to the right position. The place where the notch 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is provided with a notch 2062b3 for a semicircle on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is exposed at the front-rear position where the notch 2062b1 is formed. The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of a fraudulent act performed through the thread Y8 in which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notch 2062b1 when receiving a load of pulling both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In that state, since the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing with the long screw B11 occurs, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically lower part of the center of the ball), so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the launched ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Further, a person who commits a fraudulent act performed through a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the thread Y8 protruding toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side of the ball P9 toward the front side (see FIG. 182), the thread Y8 moves toward the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 near the player side. Therefore, by arranging the notch 2062c closer to the front surface, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the notch 2062c as compared with the case where the notch 2062c is arranged closer to the back surface side.

In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion overhanging downward is arranged. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates under the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is arranged so as to be switchable between ON and OFF when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partially front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the weight portion 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68, and FIG. 190 (b) shows. The state in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is shown. Further, in FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference, and it is shown that the button type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch is shown. It is shown that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball prevention member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed due to the opening / closing portion 68a1 tilting as shown in FIG. 190 (b), the figure immediately shows that the ball flows away. Since the state shown in 190 (a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) is restored by the timing when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (at the shortest, after 0.6 seconds). Because it can be done.

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to an object that does not flow away such as a sphere, for example, an object that travels while filling a passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example,). Bend a nail (not shown) to be planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (such as cutting a nail) is possible.

FIG. 191 is a partially front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that illegally invades is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is to be advanced while being excluded. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is dismissed by the tip portion of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the tip portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a2 is maintained in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent fraud as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, it is controlled to sound an alarm when the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , It is possible to detect cheating at an early stage.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) may be controlled to stop. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped as much as possible (see FIG. 190 (a)), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in the present embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side arranged on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it is early. Can be exchanged for. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent activity even before the replacement, and saves the trouble of forgetting the storage location, as compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option. It can play the effect. Further, it is not necessary to include the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be disposed).

Further, whether or not the return ball prevention member 68 is effective in preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent activity when the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. It is possible to maintain the deterrence of fraudulent activity by not knowing whether or not the exchange has been carried out, and even if it has been exchanged, the degree of damage is unknown to the person who commits the fraudulent activity. can.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. Consists of aspects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device 2880 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a flange portion 2887 thereof in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment. The flange portion 2887 is provided with a regulating portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip to the back surface side. The play-fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment has only a difference in the back cover 2886 as compared with the play-fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment, and is provided with the same loose-fitting device 880 in other parts. ..

The regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802. That is, the regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, the case where the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 are arranged in a single unit will be described, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. .. In addition, in FIGS. 193 and 194, operation examples of the petal operation device 2800 are shown in chronological order, and the simultaneous points are shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), 193 (b) and 194 (b), respectively. The state of is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the regulating portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are screwed portions on the side facing each other with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. It is provided with an inclined surface 2803T that is inclined so as to move away from the 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed so as to be inclined by about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the regulating unit 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is arranged outside the diameter of the front side portion 802 b of the petal 802 along the moving direction (the petal 802 is slid. The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is further loaded by the regulating portion 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. To change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 has a normal posture (a posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are oriented in the longitudinal direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) shown in FIG. 194 (a). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the central slit 814 and the side slits 815. Posture changes occur in the petals 802 to the extent possible.

As the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 changes in this way, the load from the regulating portion 2888 is received, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the slide member 2820 has the narrow slide rib 803a only in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed and the slide member 2820 has the slits 814 and 815. It is possible to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 abuts the slide rib 803a on the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T on the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. (Pressed) increases frictional resistance. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance becomes remarkable. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the lateral direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. ..

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 to the movement in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815. The torque applied to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) from the slide pin 823 can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) without waiting (slide member 2820 in a normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in an inclined posture).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b), the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 separates from the regulating portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 by the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 195, the state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193 (b) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so that the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. In FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b), and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the expanding position to the gathering position is shown in chronological order.

In FIG. 196 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, the regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b as shown in FIG. 196 (b), and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 become the normal postures. Will be returned.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830, and therefore the petals. The rotational movement of the 802 is settled, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petal 802 can be rotated at the position during expansion and then returned to the gathering position automatically.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts on the regulating portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view). If), the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided. Therefore, it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petals 802 to the fully open position and rotate the petals 802 at the fully open position.

Further, the arrangement of the regulating portion 2888 is such that the petal 802 slightly changes its posture even if it comes into contact with the petal 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position or at the petal 802 rotating at the fully open position. By setting the position so that the regulating portion 2888 can pass through and the load can be evacuated, it is possible to prevent the regulating portion 2888 from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the regulation unit 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in front view, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it serves as a mark as to whether or not the petal 802 passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern. The difference in perspective can make a difference between the petal 802 expanding to the maximum and performing a rotational operation, and the petal 802 expanding halfway to perform a rotational operation.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802 can be improved. The pattern of the mold can be made to function as a directing part. As a result, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the regulating portion 2888 from the aspect of design, the degree of freedom in designing the regulating portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 may come into contact with the regulating portion 2888 and slightly change its posture, which may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning to be conveyed to the player depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (with a flutter) while contacting the regulating portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture. ..

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts with the regulation portion 2888 is the tip position, but if the abuting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the petal 802 changes its posture. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even if the regulating portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be changed by a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 has been described, but the petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment has been described. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIGS. 198 and 199, operation examples of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) are illustrated in chronological order. Further, in FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since it is the same as the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate with each other in excess of the resistance to be generated, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 is the guide rail 832. With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the width of the central slit 814 is widened in the wall portion on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814. Of the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a to be provided and the both side slits 815 arranged on the front view clockwise side of the central slit 814, the side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the front view clockwise side. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a recessed in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction of the center slit 814, and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814. Inside, a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b, which is recessed in a wall portion on the front clockwise side in a manner of widening the width of the slits 815 on both sides in the lateral direction, is mainly provided.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from a position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side (lower side of FIG. 198 (a)) of the slit member 3810. Is formed in.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is located on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198 (a)) from the position where the flat plate member 2803 is arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. Is formed continuously to.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise in the front view will be described. First, when the rotary plate 830 starts rotating clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are moved in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (the slide rib 803a at the right end is a clock). It moves in the direction of entering the peripheral side recessed portion 3815a (see FIG. 198 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the front view of the slits 815 on both sides and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (slide member 2820, flat plate member 2803 and slit member). It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199 (a) and 199 (b)) with the portion that first abuts with the 3810 as a fulcrum.

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessing depth than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the guide pin 822 during rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above. And the contact between the central recessed portion 3814a and the screwed portion 2803S and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b are avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a recessed depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut on the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-mentioned rotation. The peripheral side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. .. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal to each other, a front view is obtained. The slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the slits 815 on both sides on the clockwise side abuts on the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise side concave portion 3815a moves to the front counterclockwise side from the concave base end of the clockwise side concave portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in a state of moving in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)). The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center side in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform an operation that was not feasible in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 194 (b). ), The rotation operation of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (rotates around the slit member 3810). Rotational motion) intervenes (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 198 (FIG. 198). a)), By rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b)). That is, the rotation operation (rotational operation of rotating around the slit member 3810) of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in front view, a flat plate member 2803 and a flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) can be obtained. From the position of the petals 802 to be fastened and fixed, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position. As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then the gathering position (see FIG. 195). Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operating device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described, but in the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment, the curved surface of the lower frame member 8320 is curved. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. It should be noted that the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIGS. 200 and 202 (a), the first state of the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 201, and the tilting device 310 is shown in FIG. 202 (b). The state in the process of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the difference between the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment and the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been explained yet. Yes, other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is arranged so as to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. On the left and right sides of the first through hole 8326a and the vibrating device 5400, the top surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined in a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b, which are formed along the line and connect the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b which are formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a front view. Mainly provided with a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c have the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as drinking water described above downward and the purpose of facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. It is a through hole having and. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is obstructed to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless to the interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be smoothed, but the possibility that foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 is high.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 is in the front-rear direction, the easier it is for the tilting device 310 to be displaced (deformed) to the left or right near the front end. It should be noted that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding up design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Transformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides is designed so as not to be a gap V13 enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right (for example, to the left), the gap V13 formed in the other (for example, to the right) is provided on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 has a size that is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the two and the coin, and can be a size that allows a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). If not, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also formed in the tilting device 310 by utilizing the play near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by giving a load toward the back side to shift (deform) the position, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In the present embodiment, when a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the left or right gap V13 or the front-back gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, and the tilting device 310 tilts, a coin is coined. Foreign matter in the shape may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202A and 202B, when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted inward toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. While it is possible to create a good feeling of operation, the part where the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202 (a)) protrudes outward from the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, which makes it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the translucency of the protective lens member 311i deteriorates, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be executed by the operation device 8300, so the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable to remove it as soon as it is discovered that the coin-shaped foreign matter has been removed, but in a state where the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shapes and arrangements of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

203 (a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operating device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (c) is a side view of the operating device 8300. It is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 in the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. 203 (e) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 203 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device 8300 in the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe.

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibrating device 5400, and is formed with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibrating device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58). To. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the center position on the left and right of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the upper surface of the extending portion 311h is tilted (left and right in the vertical view of the second state). An inclination D81 that inclines downward toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to being curved toward the tilting device 310, and an inclining D82 that inclines downward toward the front side due to the inclination of the tilting device 310. (See FIG. 201), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, it is possible to easily secure the strength of the lower frame member 8320 as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly widened to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object in a portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. It is considered to be larger than the size of the object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a left-right width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that allows light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25) to be transmitted. In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens members 313 which are connected to the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished (mirror-finished members) in the present embodiment. Is fixed) to reflect the light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

Due to this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state by using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign matter (coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light or the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame is not noticed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the member 8320 will continue to remain. It should be noted that this effect is not limited to the case of visual recognition through the first through hole 8326a, but is the same when the visual recognition is made through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is configured as a through hole capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left-right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that allows the largest possible coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin) to be discharged. The width in the normal direction is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-shaped foreign matter has slid downward along the curved shape of the leading edge of the bottom plate portion 321. You can remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used to discharge forward.

The third through hole 8326c has a central axis arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and a coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in the standing state (posture) as it is.

That is, the length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction needs to be formed in a size capable of ejecting coin-shaped foreign matter in a directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction is about 30 [mm] in the directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

To remove the coin-shaped foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the curved portion 371 of the main body is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since the installation portion 15a is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which it is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 which is opened to the right outward in the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)). Including each of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, it can be easily operated by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to promptly replace the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught with the normal operating device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the pachinko machine 10 does not operate normally and the pachinko machine 10 stops operating, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted immediately.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the board surface support device 600 is not subjected to the load from the front frame 14 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, but the board surface support device 600 in the 14th embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged so as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be in contact with the front frame 14. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the 14th embodiment of the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. Note that FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12 (the front frame 14 is not shown), and FIG. 204 (b) shows the front frame 14 as the inner frame 12. The closed state is shown. Further, in FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment is provided with a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (plate portion arranged on the back side) fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 of the main body plate portion 611 can be vertically displaced. The front-rear displacement member 2652, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and is displaceably supported in the front-rear direction, the locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the front-rear displacement. The support portion 2654, which is a portion that displaceably sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below at two front and rear positions and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653, and is on the front side of the front-rear displacement member 2652. It is provided with an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies an urging force toward the surface.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of being in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of being separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 has a slight gap between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)) and by being pushed backward by the front frame 14. It is configured to be displaceable at the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that inclines downward toward the tip side is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the front position to the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the rear position. , It is a continuously connected inclined surface.

The tilt angle and formation range of the inclined surface 2652a are such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the lower position in the front position of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and the vertical displacement member 2651 is in the upper position in the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652. Set.

According to the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is large by the thickness in the front-rear direction thereof. be able to.

As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 by the rear claw member 640 from the back surface side can be increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the rotation front claw member 620. This makes it possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force of the worker, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of selection of the worker and the workability.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 against the illegality of melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire and infiltrating the inside as it is, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. The case where it is detected that the piano wire is burnt out and the fraud is detected at an early stage has been described. However, in the fraud detection device 2280 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire, the fraud detection device 2280 is described. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is restored to a tensile shape (stored shape) by applying heat. Will be done. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape in which the back side and the lower surface side are opened, and the main body box portion 2281 stacked above the inverted cup portion 2178 and the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281 are covered with a lid. The back cover member 2582 attached from the main body box portion 2281 and the back cover member 2582 are provided with a space.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, and has an extension portion 2283 that abuts on the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and the opening is narrowed upward from the lower corner portion. The narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, the protruding portion 2285 projecting upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284, and the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 are recessed from the back side. The first conduction portion 2286, which is housed in a concave portion, one end of which projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the right wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess recessed from the back side, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and hits the upper surface of the first conduction portion 2286. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can be contacted, a torsion spring SP15 that generates a urging force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and a protrusion on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284. It is provided with a shape memory spring 2288 that is supported by the portion 2285 and is arranged below the second conduction portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion 2287, one end of separate wiring is connected to a portion overhanging the outside of the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main control device. It is connected to 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 205 (b)). c) By doing so, the continuity is cut off, and the error signal is output with the fact that the continuity is cut off as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, and so on. It is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extending portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains as it is on the long cover 173. It can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and has a property of maintaining a deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a pre-memorized shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. .. In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature (about 80 °) of about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. ..

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conduction portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion are pushed up. The continuity with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

The extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2482 in a vertically long shape in the front-rear direction, and is inserted into the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in a tension state and then returns to a low temperature state, the operator pushes down the extension portion 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce it (see FIG. 205 (b)). ) Can be returned again. That is, even after the fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the curved shape of the light guide member 540 causes a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted on both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment has a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 which schematically represents the part 2543b, and FIG. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, which schematically represents a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, in which FIG. 206 (e) schematically represents the upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. In FIG. 206 (a), the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed from a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically side by side according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portions 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

That is, the region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, the region CCVIc arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and the lower and inner lens member 530 with respect to the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 can be changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), the region CCVIb is formed with an upward concave portion 2543b which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape in which a sphere is divided into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the back surface side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is this. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), the region CCVIc is formed with a downward concave portion 2543c which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), the region CCVId is formed with a downward concave portion 2543d which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), the region CCVIe is formed with an upward concave portion 2543e which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region of the inner lens member 530 facing the curved bottom have the same shape as that of the eighth embodiment (inclination angle 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and the diameter of the bottom circle). It is formed from a 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down, and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), according to the above-described configuration, the light is advanced toward the inner lens member 530 side in the direction of collecting light, and the light is advanced toward the outer lens member 550 side in the direction of spreading light. Can be made to. That is, since the light guide member 2540 can be formed in the shape of a flat plate and have a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, the left and right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed to produce a light emitting effect. The effect can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs down is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the push-in end is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of "the button that cannot be pushed" can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of the operation (the end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to make the player notice that the tilting device 310 is in the "non-pushable button" state only after the pushing operation. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, since the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotary claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the ascending end can be sequentially switched) depending on the driving mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, and the effect can be produced in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched.

In the third embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (while the tilting device 310 is in the descending operation), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotary operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately after reaching the end point and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, while pushing back when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the accommodating member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the accommodating member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside the accommodating member 5430. When fixing the accommodating member 5430 to the tilting device 310, for example, when the convex leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321 and the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower push-in end, the convex leg portion If the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut on the accommodating member 5430 is switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the accommodating member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, the flexible member 5420 is operated at a predetermined speed or higher. It is possible to increase the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412 to form a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts on the accommodating member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, a display such as "press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press the button. Push it in at high speed and feel vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player, the button (tilting device 310) can be pressed with the specified pressing method. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button and prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and it is possible to prevent a failure that occurs when the tilting device 310 is pushed by force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut on the accommodating member 5430 while the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, while the weight member 310 is pushed to the end of movement. The 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the housing member 5430 may not be in contact with the accommodation member 5430. In this case, the vibration can be transmitted to the player in a state where the tilting device 310 is not operated to make the effect lively, while the player can change the effect (expected) by stopping the vibration when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Since it is possible to recognize (difference in degree), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. can.

As a variation of the effect, the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 are arranged so as not to be in contact with each other when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 continue. It is desired to generate both a case where the arrangement is possible to abut the same, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412 can cause two different cases.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft and the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 come into contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be in contact with the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to be in contact with the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunction cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board surface support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end portion thereof is the back side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and the game board is fixed in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there. 13 can be mounted on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable that a long path is formed in the front-rear direction directly behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. Further, by making the path bend back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, so that the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 are prevented from interfering with each other. Can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a path that bends up and down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connecting line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connection wire 453 is pulled out to the outside of the speaker assembly 450 due to the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from being disconnected from the speaker 451 even when the load is applied.

Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the back side wall portion 461H within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464, while the auxiliary protrusion portion 461H abuts more than that. In the range of length, there may be a configuration in which a step is provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, a range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T, the base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the tip side main body portion 461T are jointly used. You may configure a large speaker room with.

Further, although the volume of the base end side main body portion 461B is larger than that of the tip end side main body portion 461T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the volume may be the same. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left-right direction, or may be a position between the left-right end and the center in the left-right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (base end side main body portion 461B and tip end side main body portion 461T). The connection direction, the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491) have been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portions 467d and rib portions 467c) may be configured to overlap each other in a left-right direction view. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491. By making it difficult to perform cheating by invading the tip of the game into the game area and prolonging the time required for the cheating, it is possible to suppress the cheating. Here, examples of the suppression of fraudulent activities include suppression of fraudulent activities themselves and suppression of obtaining profits from fraudulent activities (successful fraudulent activities).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotary plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotary plate 830 and the play fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the play fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expansion operation and the gathering operation. Can be made to. As a result, the sliding operation of the petals 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The free fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or it may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 which slides and moves by the operation of the drive side arm member 910 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip end portion of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 will be described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). Since the right side of the board 13 is tilted toward the front side), the part of the game board 13 which is arranged to face the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere with each other. be able to. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 Whether or not the 600 is in the fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it can be restricted that the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not abut on the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, since the possibility that the multifunctional cover member 171 is damaged due to the collision of the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of the synthetic resin with the metal board surface support device 600 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced. Can be used for a long period of time in other uses (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light radiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a state in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The right panel unit 500 is configured to rotate around a parallel axis), so that the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, by switching the mode of the light radiated to the center frame 86 and the moving accessory that overhangs the inside of the center frame 86, the effect can be diversified.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost openings 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side on one side and on the other side. Consider switching between the case where it is placed on the front side and the case where it is placed on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged facing the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member emits light. When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (a wider range as compared with the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the moving accessory can be switched.

In this case, for example, the effect of the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory side. At the timing of facing the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) and change in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, switching that changes the light emitting portion according to the operation of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need for switching the LED 512a that controls light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness becomes higher, the amount of light becomes larger, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. It is diffused (low brightness, low light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting target (liquid crystal display or moving accessory).

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed toward the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display). By changing the posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), a beam-like (narrow state) light is emitted to the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or the liquid crystal display. As a result, it is possible to emit light in a wide range of positions away from the moving accessory and the liquid crystal while emitting light only in the details of the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken part is fragile enough to fall, and the detection sensor is placed at the position where the broken part passes when it falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the ball launch is controlled to be forcibly stopped, thereby aiming for early detection of fraudulent activity and due to fraudulent activity. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss incurred by the gaming machine hall) obtained by the cheating person.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to be made of resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in an inclined posture with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides arranged opposite to the inclined surface 2803T. The recessed portion may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance by causing the inclined surface 2803T to enter the recessed portion.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the traveling direction of the light is set to the direction of collecting the light or the direction of spreading the light by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is a direction in which the light is inclined upward in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select the aircraft to be played. It is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward. This makes it possible to improve the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

Further, for example, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe which are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530, and an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in the direction of tilting upward, so that the aircraft to be played is selected. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking in the direction of the player, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, the ball stored in the upper plate 17 can be illuminated with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Point where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means for a player to push in, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operating means overhangs the player from the first state. It is possible to configure two states, and it is provided with an urging means that urges the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is oriented toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

Also, from the player's playing posture, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the front, so the force applied by the player to the operating means should be naturally weakened. Can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, and can be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as the fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so it is possible to provide a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

As a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side surface of the left little finger is placed near the shaft rod, and the palm is placed near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and the thumb side is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is placed facing the operating means. Will be done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device includes a driving means for automatically operating the operating means and generating a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction facing the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled from the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button and receiving a high load on the driving means.

In the gaming machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means operated by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is said to be via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation causes the movement. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By making it a means, it is possible to change the movement width in which the operating device moves by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A6 gaming machine configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement is limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means that is disposed inside the operating device and irradiates light toward the player is provided, and the second state is compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means unless the aim is aimed at. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. A featured gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is composed of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Points where the repulsive force during normal times is small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing a player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state. A game in which a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from a second state to a first state is provided, and an urging means for generating an urging force for moving from a first state to a second state is provided. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1 By pushing back the operating means with the two driving means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive it.

According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting discrimination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the gaming machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determining means is provided with a position difference detecting means for detecting and a moving direction determining means for determining the moving direction of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detecting means and the detection value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the moving direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a manner synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in the direction facing the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is characterized by being composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a support means is provided, and the closer the operating means is to the terminal position, the greater the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means that supports the driving motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (direction close to the operating means), so that the driving force that pushes back the operating means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration effecting device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means thereof. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the player emphasizes the ability to operate lightly, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. It is possible to reduce the speed and the possibility that the operating means will be damaged, but there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. The voice coil motor is controlled to be pushed out to an extended position, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operating means is arranged at a position where the voice coil motor can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Game machine C2 to play.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means are arranged at a position where they can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operating means while suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means, which is the end portion on the opposite side to the operating means, is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed, so that the operating means can be operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Prevents damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with a clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means is provided with the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for the purpose of production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is being driven in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in the operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. , There is a possibility that a large load will be generated on the drive means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the production is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The crossing direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Each of the convex portions is provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means exerts a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not disappear completely at a distance, but the resistance is periodically restored. As a result, when the player releases his hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, if the player holds the button when the button is driven "as an effect", one phase of the operation of the button will pass. Then, if the player releases his hand in the middle of the process, if he / she moves from the end of the first phase, the period in which the button is stopped becomes longer, and the feeling that "the player has started to move because the load is released" is reduced. It comes off.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane and the transmitting means of the releasing means are transmitted. It is possible to prevent the movement of the means from being stopped in the direction of proximity and separation. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operating modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operating means is the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the lapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the driving means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, since the driving means is usually hidden from the player and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can be watched over by the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means. The operating means is configured to operate between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and is a first means for suppressing the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a variable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means. A release load means for giving a load for disengaging the engagement of one means to the operation means to the first means is provided, disengagement by the release load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the movement. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the end position of the operation means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the position of the releasing load means is performed based on the operation of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the releasing load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmitting means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. An example is a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized in other phases.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load given from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operably arranged by the operation of the release load means. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it can be switched whether or not it operates synchronously.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the releasing load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmitting means by the load from the first means, and the releasing load means is operated by the operation of the releasing load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but since the rotation cycles are different, the second rotating means is predetermined. It is possible to prepare a plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operation means is moved toward the second position. , The range of production can be expanded. For example, it is possible to realize an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means configured to be movable between and having a vibrating vibrating portion and a receiving means arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut on the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can abut on the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibration means that transmits vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. .. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases the vibration, and there is a problem that the vibration may not be noticed by the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration for the first time by operating the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the mode of the player's operation. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contacting state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation strength of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means during vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in a direction close to the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means is characterized in that the deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means is lower than the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. ..

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the supporting means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a portion of the gaming machine F3 with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving means is loaded. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the drive means.

Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, in the frame part of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means can be used. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, when the driving force generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means and the transmitting means. There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the rotation shaft. The gaming machine G2, which is characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means and a role as a portion for generating a bearing force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is convexly provided in parallel with the axis of rotation, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected to each other, and elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotating shaft in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member tends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Can increase the operating resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 comprising a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to an axis in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration so that the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent ball goat with thread. Pachinko machine H>
In a gaming machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the gaming balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launcher and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the gaming ball is weak, the gaming ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. Therefore, for example, an illegal tool with a game ball connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired at a low firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of being able to gain fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball is performed by using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-shaped member) by the loading means.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the loading means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the gaming machine H3 or H4 is provided with a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the loading means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a receiving dish, which is a dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving dish is a portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharging side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball discharged from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, thereby passing through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball ejection portion, which is a portion for discharging the game ball to be dispensed from the payout device, is to the receiving dish, which is the dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other gaming ball was performed using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the payout ball can make it easier to damage the thread.

<Structure of board retainer. Pachinko machine I>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from one side.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the fixing means is configured so that the fixing means can be changed only after the gaming board is pushed into the position in the used state. Therefore, when the gaming board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, so that the gaming board is pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the gaming board and applies a pushing force, so that the gaming board can be pushed to the position in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is characterized in that the gaming means is displaced to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the gaming means unusable. ..

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means becomes unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removal work of the gaming means can be improved and it is a game. Since it is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means is a gaming machine I4 including a contacting means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the gaming means, the state changing means changes to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the gaming means against the state changing means, the state changing means can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is configured to be accepted by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means can be used to efficiently apply a load to the contacting means via the gaming means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means cannot be used by the state changing means so that the gaming means cannot be used. The gaming machine I6 is provided with a closing restricting unit that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the gaming means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Pachinko machine J>
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotation axis side of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, an arrangement means is arranged in a path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different between the first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the first place and the second means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the second place. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by a method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply placed. Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed from the cup shape, so that it is possible to prevent further intrusion of the invading member.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting the electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the gaming means. Characterized gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry restricting portion is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. It is possible to easily generate the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means is provided with a eliminating means for guiding a member that has entered from the outside to a eliminating area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the gaming means by the arranging means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member that has entered from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a decorative board with a five-sheet structure. Involved in fraud prevention. Pachinko machine K>
The first and second means are arranged so as to face each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and the first means and the second means are arranged along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting with the first direction. The gaming machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the machine. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means in the gaming machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3, characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by the fitting generated by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. As a result, even when a fraudulent act of destroying the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of fastening and fixing thereof is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means fixed to the member of the above-mentioned member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guide means.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with a contacting means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contacting means. Can be done. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means illegally attempts to disassemble. can do.

<Point L for utilizing the curved light guide means. As a point, it has not been reached>
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means arranged facing the light guide means and projecting the light passing through the light guide means are provided. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion facing the convex portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant. The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed depending on the unit.

In the gaming machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected in the concave facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means with the light-guiding means and is projected with light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projecting means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion facing the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion facing the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission property.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transparency is formed from substantially the same material, by incident the same light on the light guide means, the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the projected means and the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the counterprojection means. Can be different.

<Bass reflex speaker layout structure. Pachinko machine M>
The first means and the second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other and form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means arranged so that at least a part thereof enters the internal space, and the above-mentioned. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16588). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine and sent to the outside of the gaming machine, so that it is easy to produce a bass sound. There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. It is possible to cancel the regulation of the left-right width and allow the vibration wave to travel at any distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the pachinko machine M2, wherein the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. By abutting against each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a directing means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the effect means for supporting the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the directing means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without squeezing the space used for the directing. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop on the way. Pachinko machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction. In a gaming machine provided with a second displacement means that can be switched between a non-following state that displaces in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, at least when the second displacement means is in the following state. The gaming machine N1 is provided with a third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end portion. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means is set. , It can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Gaming machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is characterized in that the state of the second displacement means can be changed by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the gaming machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a function as a production device.

The gaming machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. The gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly, so that the displacement resistance should be prevented from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As a point, it has not been reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). Kai 2012-048970 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted in the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Pachinko machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the supporting portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having a low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are composed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are formed by a shape based on the shape of the solid object having different directions, so that the second opening is formed. It is possible to easily remove a solid object through the portion.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. ..

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E4 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E4 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 A gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E4 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means for changing the state between a fixed state in which the gaming board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the gaming board is removable from the inner frame (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). ).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of work efficiency related to the fixing means. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having good work efficiency related to fixing means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is open to the gaming means used during the game and one side facing the gaming means, and can accept the gaming means from that one side. The receiving means is provided with a state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state in which the gaming means is unusable to a usable state in which the gaming means can be used. The state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the game means from one side when the game means is put into the use state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the state changing means changes the state to an unusable state in which the gaming means becomes unusable. Displace to one side.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable, so that the proximity means becomes unusable. However, it evacuates to the outside of the gaming means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, work efficiency can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the work efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means from the receiving means can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the work efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means from the receiving means is improved by the evacuation of the proximity means. be able to.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13 Game board (game means)
14 Front frame (blocking means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of receiving plate)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
145,9145,10145 Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
159 Open / close regulation part (blockage regulation part)
173 Long cover member (part of elimination means)
178 Reverse cup part (part of placement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of elimination means)
180 Bundling movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operation device 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous striking discrimination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft part (Shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (urging means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of accommodation means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing part (part of support part)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Main body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaged teeth)
343d Coil spring (urging means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disk cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (convex part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection line (passing member)
460 front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming ribs (bending means, projecting portion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing convex part (part of the opening)
487 Passage forming ribs (bending means, projecting portion)
500 Right panel unit (directing means)
500L left heavy plate unit (first means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (means to be connected)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 513c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 Inclined rib part (contact means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Convex part (part of connecting part)
600 Board surface support device (state change means)
620 Rotating front claw member (proximity means)
640 Rotating rear claw member (contact means)
801 Support base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (driving means)
830 rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disk cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance)
5412 Weight member (vibrating part, part of repulsive means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means and repulsion means)
5430 Accommodating member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 disk member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disk member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodating means)
8326a 1st through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
8326b 2nd through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
8326c 3rd through hole (part of the 2nd opening)
9142a Right slope (part of payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10145d Rolling plate (regulatory means)
E1 notification device (detection means)
P1a deformed part (deformed part)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped route (bent part)
V13, V14 gap

Claims (3)

It is provided with a gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and accepting the gaming means from that one side.
The receiving means includes a state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state of the gaming means.
The state changing means is a gaming machine including a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from one side when the gaming means is put into the used state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the state changing means changes the state to an unusable state that makes the gaming means unusable, and causes the gaming means to be displaced to the one side. The first or second aspect of the present invention is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means as the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable. The described gaming machine.

Images